Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester

Transcription

1 Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual Agilent Technologies

2 Notices Agilent Technologies, Inc No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as governed by United States and international copyright laws. Manual Part Number N Revision Third Edition, March 2008 Printed in Malaysia Agilent Technologies Microwave Products (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. Bayan Lepas Free Industrial Zone Penang, Malaysia Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is, and is subject to being changed, without notice, in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, with regard to this manual and any information contained herein, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this document or of any information contained herein. Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control. Technology Licenses The hardware and/or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U.S. Government prime contract or subcontract, Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR (June 1987) or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause. Use, duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms, and non-dod Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR (c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR (June 1987) or DFAR (b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in any technical data. Safety Notices CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. WARNING A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury or death. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual ii

3 I Preface Thank-you for purchasing the Agilent N9360A Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM). This option is the GSM software for the N9360A Multi UE Tester. Before using the tester, the user is advised to read this manual carefully to ensure correct usage and also to fully utilize the tester capability. This manual is a reference document and the user is advised to keep it carefully for future reference. The manual includes the characteristics of GSM, the tester operation, test procedures and screen references. Refer to the N9360A Installation Guide for information regarding installation and details of the tester. Refer also to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual for information about the test functions of the Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) and the N9360A cdma2000 User Manual for information about the test functions of cdma2000 (Code Division Multiple Access). Notation The following notations are used in this manual: Softkey : indicates a softkey; [Screen Name] : indicates a screen name; Tester/tester : indicates the N9360A Multi UE Tester. Please note that the screens of the user interface (UI) and values on the screen used in this manual can be different from the actual screens. Notices The information contained in this manual is subjected to change with notice. No part of this manual may be reproduced either mechanically, electronically or otherwise, without permission from Agilent Technologies, Inc. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual iii

4 I Trademarks Ethernet is the registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation. EPSON is the registered trademark of the EPSON Corporation. cdma2000 is a registered trademark of the telecommunications Industry Association (TIA-USA). Other product names and companies used herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or Agilent Technologies, Inc. For registered trademarks, the trademarks symbols and are omitted in this manual. iv N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

5 I DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to EN ISO/IEC :2004 Manufacturer s Name: Manufacturer s Address: Generic example Agilent Technologies Microwave Products (M) Sdn. Bhd Bayan Lepas Free Industrial Zone, 11900, Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia Declares under sole responsibility that the product as originally delivered Product Name: Models Number: Product Options: Multi UE Tester N9360A-134, N9360A-135 (GS8210) This declaration covers all options of the above product(s) complies with the essential requirements of the following applicable European Directives, and carries the CE marking accordingly: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) and conforms with the following product standards: EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326:2002 / EN 61326:1997+A1:1998+A2:2001+A3:2003 CISPR 11:1990 / EN55011:1990 Class A Group 1 IEC :1995 / EN : kv CD, 8 kv AD IEC :1995 / EN : V/m, MHz IEC :1995 / EN : kv signal lines, 1 kv power lines IEC :1995 / EN : kv line-line, 1 kv line-ground IEC :1996 / EN : V, MHz IEC :1994 / EN : cycle / 100% Canada: ICES-001:2004 Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS CISPR11:2004 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems. Safety IEC :2001 / EN :2001 Canada: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No USA: ANSI/UL : This DoC applies to above-listed products placed on the EU market after: 20-Jun-2008 Date Tay Eng Su Quality Manager For further information, please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office, agent or distributor, or Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH, Herrenberger Straße 130, Böblingen, Germany. Template: A , Rev. E N9360A_134_ 135 DoC Revision 1.0 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual v

6 I Product Regulations EMC Safety IEC :2002 / EN :1997+A1:1998+A2:2001+A3:2003 CISPR 11:1990 / EN 55011:1990 Group 1 Class A IEC :1995 / EN :1995 (ESD 4kV CD, 8kV AD) IEC :1995 / EN :1996 (3V/m, 80% AM) IEC :1995 / EN :1995 (EFT 0.5kV line-line, 1kV line-earth) IEC :1995 / EN :1995 (Surge 0.5kV line-line, 1kV line-earth) IEC :1996 / EN :1996 (3V, 0.15~80 MHz, 80% AM, power line) IEC :1994 / EN :1994 (Dips 1 cycle, 100%) Canada: ICES-001:2004 Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS CISPR11:2004 IEC :2001 / EN :2001 Canada: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No USA: ANSI/UL :2004 Performance Criteria B A A A A A Additional Information: The product herewith complies with the essential requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and carries the CE Marking accordingly (European Union). 1 Performance Criteria: A Pass - Normal operation, no effect. B Pass - Temporary degradation, self recoverable. C Pass - Temporary degradation, operator intervention required. D Fail - Not recoverable, component damage. N/A Not applicable Notes: Regulatory Information for Canada ICES/NMB-001:2004 This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est confomre à la norme NMB-001 du Canada. Regulatory Information for Australia/New Zealand This ISM device complies with Australian/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR11:2004 vi N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

7 Contents 1 Legal Information Preface I-iii Notation I-iii Notices I-iii Trademarks I-iv Legal Information 1-2 Warranty 1-2 Technology Licenses 1-2 Restricted Rights Legend 1-2 Service And Support 1-3 Agilent On The Web 1-3 Agilent By Phone Caution and Safety Requirements Safety Information 2-2 Safety Summary 2-2 Safety Notices 2-2 About pictorial symbols 2-2 Example of pictorial symbols 2-3 Warning Label 2-3 General 2-3 When Operating The Tester Overview Functions 3-2 Features 3-4 Standard Configuration 3-6 Options 3-7 Accessories Operating Procedures Test Flow 4-2 Preparation for Each Test 4-3 System Requirement 4-3 Installing the Test SIM 4-3 Connection 4-4 Test Procedure 4-7 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual vii

8 5 Screen Reference Activating the Tester 4-7 Selection of System 4-15 Selection of the Function Mode on the Initial Screen 4-17 Correction 4-18 Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Automatic Test 4-24 Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GSM Mode) 4-35 Handover 4-47 Emergency Call 4-55 Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GPRS Mode) 4-63 Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) 4-74 Testing a Mobile Phone by TX Analyzer 4-87 Testing a Mobile Phone by Signal Generator 4-96 Ending a Test 4-99 Disconnecting the Mobile Phone 4-99 Turning off the Tester 4-99 Screen Flow Chart 5-2 Top Menu Screen 5-3 Configuration Screen 5-6 Option Installation/Backup 5-10 Firmware Update Screen 5-13 Update Flash Screen 5-18 Network Setting Screen 5-22 Initial Screen 5-26 Return to Menu Screen 5-29 PRESET Screen 5-30 Automatic Test 5-33 Overview 5-33 RF Test in Automatic Test 5-34 Stand-by Screen 5-36 Measuring Screen 5-42 Measuring Talk Screen 5-45 Aborted screen 5-48 Sequence 2 Screen 5-51 Summary Screen 5-53 Procedure to Obtain a Graph/Value Screen 5-58 Graph/Value Screen 5-59 Manual Test (GSM Mode) 5-68 viii N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

9 Overview 5-68 RF Test 5-69 Stand-by Screen 5-71 Connection Screen 5-78 Measuring Screen 5-82 Result Screen 5-84 Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value Screen 5-88 Graph/Value Screen 5-89 SMS Screen Manual Test (GPRS Mode) Overview RF Test Stand-by Screen Attached Screen Connected Screen Result Screen Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen Graph/Value Screen Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) Overview RF Test in Manual Test Stand-by Screen Attached Screen Connected Screen Result Screen Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen Graph/Value Screen TX Analyzer Overview RF Test in TX Analyzer Stand-by Screen Measuring Screen Result Screen Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen Graph/Value Screen Signal Generator Overview Signal Generator Screen Configuration Configuration Screen Configuration: Test Sequence Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual ix

10 Configuration: Test Condition Screen Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) Configuration: Test Condition (Limit) Screen Configuration: File Management Saving a Test Setup File Recalling a Test Setup File Deleting a Test Setup File Replacing Test Setup Files (HDD is selected) Replacing Test Setup Files (USB Memory Device is selected) Undo Confirmation (HDD is selected) Undo Confirmation (USB Memory Device is selected) Configuration: Network Setting Troubleshooting Item to be checked 6-2 Error Information 6-7 Error Screen Performance and Specifications Measurement Performance 7-2 Peak TX Power 7-2 Power Ramp 7-2 Frequency Error 7-3 Phase Error (GMSK) 7-3 Burst Timing 7-3 BER, FER/BLER 7-4 RX Quality 7-4 RX Level 7-4 Actual Timing Advance 7-5 Spectrum Monitor 7-5 Frequency Offset 7-5 AM Modulation 7-6 EVM (8-PSK, Option G03) 7-6 Origin offset suppression (8-PSK, Option G03) 7-6 Output RF Spectrum (8-PSK, Option G03) 7-6 A B Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Appendix B General Information in the GSM System The GSM System B-2 RF Channels B-2 Power Classes B-2 x N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

11 Power Control Levels B-3 RX Level B-4 RX Quality B-5 Limits for BER and FER B-5 Limits for Frequency Error B-5 C D Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Introduction C-3 Specifications C-3 Operating the Antenna Coupler C-4 Appendix D Softkey Menu Multi-language Introduction D-2 How to switch the Softkey Menu D-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xi

12 xii N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

13 List Of Figures 1 Legal Information 2 Caution and Safety Requirements 3 Overview 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-1. Test Flow 4-2 Figure 4-2. Typical Test Setup of the Tester 4-3 Figure 4-3. Connecting a Printer 4-5 Figure 4-4. Connecting a USB-GPIB Converter 4-6 Figure 4-5. Display Annotation 4-7 Figure 4-6. Value Storage Softkeys 4-11 Figure 4-7. Memory Function 4-12 Figure 4-8. Value Storage Softkeys 4-13 Figure 4-9. Changing Magnification Softkey 4-14 Figure [Top Menu] Screen 4-15 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-16 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-17 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-21 Figure [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen 4-23 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-24 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-25 Figure [Configuration: Test Sequence 1] Screen 4-26 Figure [Configuration: Test Sequence 2] Screen 4-27 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-28 Figure [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] screen 4-29 Figure [Auto Test: Stand-by] Screen 4-30 Figure [Auto Test: Stand-by] Value Screen 4-31 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Screen 4-33 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Graph/Value Screen 4-34 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-35 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-36 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-37 Figure [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-38 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) 4-39 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) 4-40 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GSM) 4-41 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/ Value Screen (GSM) 4-42 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (GSM) 4-44 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GSM) 4-45 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xiii

14 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result (GSM) 4-46 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-47 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-48 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-49 Figure [Configuration(GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-50 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) 4-51 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Screen (GSM) 4-52 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GSM) 4-53 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (GSM) 4-54 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-55 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-56 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-57 Figure [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-58 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) 4-59 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Emergency Call Screen (GSM) 4-60 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Emergency Measurement Result Screen (GSM) 4-61 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen(GSM) 4-62 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-63 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-64 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-65 Figure [Configuration (GPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-66 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GPRS) 4-67 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (GPRS) 4-68 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (GPRS) 4-69 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GPRS) 4-70 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Screen (GPRS) 4-71 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (GPRS) 4-72 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GPRS) 4-73 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-75 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)Configuration] Screen 4-76 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-77 Figure [Configuration (EGPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-78 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (EGPRS) 4-79 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (EGPRS) 4-80 Figure [Measuring] Connected Screen (EGPRS Mode) 4-81 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Measurement Result Screen (EGPRS) 4-82 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Screen (EGPRS) 4-83 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (EGPRS) 4-85 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (EGPRS) 4-86 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-87 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-88 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen 4-89 Figure [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen 4-90 xiv N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

15 Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen 4-91 Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Summary Screen 4-92 Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Graph/Value Screen 4-93 Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Graph/Value Zoom Screen 4-94 Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Screen 4-95 Figure [Initial] Screen 4-96 Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-97 Figure [Signal Generator] Screen Screen Reference Figure 5-1. Screen Flow Chart 5-2 Figure 5-2. Selectable Systems 5-3 Figure 5-3. [Top Menu] Screen 5-4 Figure 5-4. [Configuration] Screen 5-6 Figure 5-5. Part of [Configuration] screen (without Option E00) 5-7 Figure 5-6. Part of [Configuration] screen (without Option E01) 5-7 Figure 5-7. [Firmware Update] Screen 5-14 Figure 5-8. [Update Flash] Screen 5-19 Figure 5-9. [Network Setting] Screen 5-22 Figure [Initial] Screen 5-26 Figure [Return to Menu] Screen 5-29 Figure PRESET Screen (Menu) 5-30 Figure PRESET Screen (GSM) 5-31 Figure [Auto Test: Stand-by] Simplified Screen 5-36 Figure [Auto Test: Stand-by] Detailed Screen 5-37 Figure [Auto Test: Stand-by] Value Screen 5-38 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Simplified Screen 5-42 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Detailed Screen 5-43 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Value Screen 5-43 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Simplified Screen 5-45 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Detailed Screen 5-46 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Value Screen 5-47 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Aborted Simplified Screen 5-49 Figure [Automatic Test: Measuring] Next Sequence 2 Screen 5-52 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Simplified Screen 5-54 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Detailed Screen 5-55 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Value Screen 5-55 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Peak TX Power Screen 5-59 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen 5-61 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen 5-62 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Phase Error Screen 5-64 Figure [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen 5-66 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xv

16 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM 5-71 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) 5-77 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Connection Screen (GSM) 5-78 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Connection Screen (GSM) 5-79 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Screen (GSM) 5-82 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) 5-83 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] BS Call Result Screen (GSM) 5-84 Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] MS Call Result Screen (GSM) 5-85 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen (GSM) 5-89 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (GSM) 5-90 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (GSM) 5-94 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen (GSM) 5-97 Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Output RF Spectrum Screen (GSM) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GSM) Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] SMS Screen (GSM) Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity in BLER Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Output RF Spectrum Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity in BLER Screen (EGPRS) xvi N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

17 Figure [Manual Test: Output RF Spectrum] Screen (EGPRS) Figure [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (EGPRS) Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Measuring] Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Result Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen Figure [TZ Analyzer: Stand-by] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] EVM Frequency Error/OOS Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Output RF Spectrum] Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Span 0-400kHz Screen Figure [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Span ±100 khz Screen Figure [Signal Generator] Screen Figure [Configuration] Screen Figure Part of the [Configuration] Screen (without Option E00 and E02) Figure Part of the [Configuration] Screen (without Option E01) Figure [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] (GSM) Screen Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] (GPRS) Screen Figure [Configuration: Test Condition] (EGPRS) Screen Figure [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Figure [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit) Figure [Configuration (GPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Figure [Configuration (EGPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Figure [Configuration: File Management] Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Save-1 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Save-2 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Save-3 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Save-4 Screen Figure [Configuration: File management] Save-5 Screen Figure [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Recall-1 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Recall-2 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Recall-3 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-1 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-2 Screen Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-3 Screen Figure File Replace Screen (HDD is selected) Figure File Replace Screen (USB memory device is selected) Figure Undo Screen (HDD is selected) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xvii

18 Figure Undo Screen (USB memory device is selected) Figure [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen Troubleshooting Figure 6-1. An Example of [Error] Screens Performance and Specifications A B C D Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Appendix B General Information in the GSM System Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Appendix D Softkey Menu Multi-language xviii N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

19 List Of Tables 1 Legal Information Table 1-1. Agilent Call Centers and Regional Headquarters Caution and Safety Requirements 3 Overview Table 3-1. Main Functions 3-2 Table 3-2. Configuration 3-6 Table 3-3. Options 3-7 Table 3-4. Accessories Operating Procedures Table 4-1. Description of the Display Annotation Screen Reference Table 5-1. [Configuration] Screen Input Field 5-8 Table 5-2. [Network Setting] Screen Input Field 5-23 Table 5-3. [Initial] Screen Input Field 5-28 Table 5-4. Automatic Test Measurement Item 5-34 Table 5-5. [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Screen Input Field 5-40 Table 5-6. [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Screen Mobile Phone Information 5-41 Table 5-7. [Automatic Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information 5-44 Table 5-8. [Auto Test: Stand-by] Summary Screen Input Field 5-57 Table 5-9. [Auto Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information 5-57 Table [Automatic Test] Peak TX Power Screen Field 5-60 Table [Automatic Test] Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field 5-63 Table [Auto Test] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field 5-65 Table [Auto Test] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field 5-67 Table Manual Test (GSM mode) Measurement Item 5-69 Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field 5-73 Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] GSM Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information 5-75 Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field 5-80 Table [Manual Test: Measuring] GSM Mode Connection Screen Mobile Phone Information 5-81 Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field 5-92 Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field 5-93 Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Input Field 5-95 Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field 5-96 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xix

20 Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field 5-98 Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/RX Quality/RX Level Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode ORFS Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/RX Quality/RX Level Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode SMS Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GSM Mode SMS Information Table Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot Table Manual Test GPRS Mode Measurement Item Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information Table [Manual Test: Measuring] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Information Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Field Table Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot Table Manual Test EGPRS Mode Measurement Item Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information Table [Manual Test: Measuring] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Information Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Input Field xx N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

21 Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode EVM Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode EVM Screen Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Field Table TX Analyzer Measurement Item Table [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Input Field Table [TX Analyzer] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen Input Field Table [TX Analyzer] Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Table [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Input Field Table [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field Table [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor (span 0-400kHz) Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor (span ±100kHz) Screen Field Table [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Table [Signal Generator] Screen Input Field Table [Configuration] Screen Input Field Table Setting Combination for Automatic Test Flow Table [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field Table Configuration: Test Sequence Measurement Item Table [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field Table [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Input Field Table [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Input Field Table Configuration: Test Condition Measurement Item Table Error Messages of the File Management Table [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen Troubleshooting Table 6-1. Item to be checked 6-2 Table 6-2. The time for measuring 6-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual xxi

22 Table 6-3. Alarm Notification Error Code 6-8 Table 6-4. UI Timer Error Code Performance and Specifications Table 7-1. Peak TX Power 7-2 Table 7-2. Power Ramp 7-2 Table 7-3. Frequency Error 7-3 Table 7-4. Phase Error 7-3 Table 7-5. Burst Timing 7-3 Table 7-6. BER, FER / BLER 7-4 Table 7-7. RX Quality 7-4 Table 7-8. RX Level 7-4 Table 7-9. Actual Timing Advance 7-5 Table Spectrum Monitor 7-5 Table Frequency Offset 7-5 Table AM Modulation 7-6 Table EVM (8-PSK) 7-6 Table Origin Offset suppression 7-6 Table Output RF Spectrum 7-6 A B C D Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1. Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A-2 Appendix B General Information in the GSM System Table B-1. RF Channels B-2 Table B-2. Power Classes B-2 Table B-3. Power Control Levels B-3 Table B-4. RX Level B-4 Table B-5. RX Quality B-5 Table B-6. Limits for BER and FER B-5 Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Appendix D Softkey Menu Multi-language xxii N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

23 1 Legal Information Warranty 1-2 Technology Licenses 1-2 Restricted Rights Legend 1-2 Service And Support 1-3 Agilent On The Web 1-3 Agilent By Phone 1-3 Agilent Technologies 1-1

24 1 Legal Information Legal Information Warranty Technology Licenses Restricted Rights Legend The material contained in this document is provided as is, and is subject to being changed, without notice, in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, with regard to this manual and any information contained herein, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this document or of any information contained herein. Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control. The hardware and/or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. If software is for use in the performance of a U.S. Government prime contract or subcontract, Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR (June 1995), or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR (June 1987) or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause. Use, duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms, and non-dod Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR (c)(1-2)(June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR (June 1987) or DFAR (b)(2)(november 1995), as applicable in any technical data. 1-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

25 Legal Information 1 Service And Support Agilent On The Web Agilent By Phone Any adjustment, maintenance, or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel. Contact your customer engineer through your local Agilent Technologies Service Center. You can find information about technical and professional services, product support, and equipment repair and service on the Web: Double-click the link to Test & Measurement. Select your country from the drop-down menus. The Web page that appears next has contact information specific for your country If you do not have access to the Internet, call one of the numbers in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Agilent Call Centers and Regional Headquarters United States and Canada: Test and Measurement Call Center (800) (toll-free in US) Europe: (41 22) Japan: Measurement Assistance Center (81) Latin America: Asia-Pacific: (85 22) Manufacturing Address Agilent Technologies Microwave Products (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. Bayan Lepas Free Industrial Zone, Penang, Malaysia. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 1-3

26 1 Legal Information THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 1-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

27 2 Caution and Safety Requirements Safety Summary 2-2 Safety Notices 2-2 Warning Label 2-3 General 2-3 When Operating The Tester 2-4 Agilent Technologies 2-1

28 2 Caution and Safety Requirements Safety Information Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument. Agilent Technologies, Inc. assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. Safety Notices CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. WARNING A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury or death. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. NOTE A NOTE denotes important information. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which is essential to highlight. About pictorial symbols Various pictorial symbols are used in this manual and on the Tester for the correct and safe usage of the Tester. This is to prevent any harm to users, third parties, and property. The pictorial symbols and meanings are indicated below. 2-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

29 Caution and Safety Requirements 2 Example of pictorial symbols Symbol Δ indicates an attention (including danger or warning). The caution detail (electric shock in this case) is indicated inside of the symbol. Symbol indicates prohibition. The actual prohibition (disassembling prohibition in this case) is indicated in the vicinity or inside of the symbol. Symbol indicates a mandatory action or an instruction. The actual detail (in this case, remove the power plug from the outlet) is indicated inside of the symbol. Warning Label A warning label is stuck on the front panel of the Tester. Do not remove, damage or modify the warning label. General WARNING The protection provided by the N9360A tester may be impaired if the tester is used in a manner not specified by Agilent or the instructions on the display are not followed. WARNING DO NOT INSTRUMENT COVERS. Operating personnel must not remove any instrument covers. Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made only by qualified service personnel. Products that appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by a qualified service personnel. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 2-3

30 2 Caution and Safety Requirements When Operating The Tester CAUTION Make sure that the input signal level does not exceed the maximum level allowed. Tester failure may result otherwise. CAUTION Do not turn off the Line switch on the rear panel of the Tester while the LINE LED on the front panel of the Tester is lit in green. Otherwise, Tester failure may occur. 2-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

31 3 Overview Functions 3-2 Features 3-4 Standard Configuration 3-6 Options 3-7 Accessories 3-7 This chapter outlines the feature of the GSM Option. For functions of the W-CDMA Option, refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual, and for functions of the cdma2000 Option, refer to the N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual. Agilent Technologies 3-1

32 3 Overview GSM Option is a software for N9360A Multi UE Tester which supports the signaling tests and the RF performance tests in inspection processes for production, service, repair and maintenance. This product supports the GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 bands. Also, this product newly implements various functions such as GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) EGPRS (Option G03 is required) and SMS (Short Message Service) and offers major tests with high speed and ease. This product can carry out the radio performance tests with call processes. In addition, this product implements TX Analyzer function to execute RF radio performance tests without call processes and Signal Generator function used to adjust the radio parts. Functions Table 3-1 shows the functions of this Tester in the GSM Option. Table 3-1 Main Functions Option GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Function Multi band: GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900 Protocol Test GSM (Option G00) Location update MS Call Talk RF Test MS Release BS Call BS Release 3-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

33 Overview 3 Table 3-1 Main Functions Option Function GPRS (Option G00) EGPRS (Option G03) SMS Attach Connect Disconnect Coding scheme: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4 Multi slot: 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, 4 1 (Down Up) Attach Connect Disconnect Modulation and Coding scheme: MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4 (GMSK) MCS5, MCS6, MCS7, MCS8, MCS9 (8-PSK) Puncturing scheme: P1, P2, P3 * Multi slot: 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, 4 1 Call Broadcast Mobile Terminate Mobile Originate N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 3-3

34 3 Overview Table 3-1 Main Functions Option Remote Control Function RF Tests TX Analyzer Signal Generator AM Modulation Frequency Offset Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Frequency Error Phase Error (RMS, Peak) (GSM, GPRS Option G00, EGPRS/ GMSK Option G03) BER (GSM, GPRS) Ethernet GP-IB (Option E00 or Option E02) Serial (Option E01) BLER (GPRS, EGPRS) RX Quality (GSM Option G00) RX Level (GSM Option G00) FAST BER (GSM Option G00) EVM (RMS, PEAK, 95%) (EGPRS, 8-PSK Option G03) Origin Offset Suppression (EGPRS Option G03) * P1, P2 is valid for all. P3 is valid only when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS3, MCS4, MCS7, MCS8, and MCS9. Features Easy-to-operate Automatic Test The tests from call processes to the radio performance tests are executed automatically with easy operation. Each test item in Automatic Test can be set to either On or Off. Testing time can be shortened by setting the unnecessary test items to Off. 3-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

35 Overview 3 Shortening of Testing Time In Automatic Test, tests are executed while preset traffic channels are automatically handed over. Consequently, re-testing for each traffic channel is not required and testing time can be shortened. Various Test Functions Besides Automatic Test, Manual Test, Signal Generator and Spectrum Monitor, functions such as GPRS (CS1, CS2, CS3 and CS4), EGPRS (Option G03, MCS1-9) and SMS are added to this product. Therefore, this product can meet the needs in every inspection process. Extensive Interfaces Ethernet, USB, GP-IB (Option E00 or Option E02) and Serial (Option E01) port are prepared. The USB ports are used to connect a printer, a USB-GPIB converter or a USB memory device for firmware update or saving and restoring parameters. Ethernet, GP-IB, and Serial are used for remote control. External Control Function (Remote Control) Remote control is available using Ethernet, GP-IB (Option E00 or Option E02) or Serial (Option E01). Each interface port uses the same commands. An interface port which adapts to user's equipment is selectable. 4-band Handover Handover is executed through all channels of four bands while being connected. System Handover System Handover from W-CDMA (Option W00) to GSM can be executed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 3-5

36 3 Overview Standard Configuration Table 3-2 shows the standard configuration of the Tester. Check the components before using the Tester. Table 3-2 Configuration Item name Type Quantity Remarks GSM Standard G00 Preinstalled 1 Installed on the Tester User Manual N9360A Programming Manual N9360A Quick Reference N9360A Installation Guide N9360A Contained in the CD-R (Type: N ) Antenna coupler N9360A-A02 1 Frequency Range: 824 to 1990 MHz Coupling Factor: 15 db (at 824 to 960 MHz) 13 db (at 1710 to 1880 MHz) 11 db (at 1880 to 1990 MHz) Certificate of Calibration 1 Note: "x" in the above table differs depending on the revision of the document. 3-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

37 Overview 3 Options Table 3-3 shows the options of the Tester. For the specification of the options, contact the Agilent Sales Department or a distributor. Table 3-3 Options Item name Type Remarks GP-IB Port E00 IEEE, 24 pin Connector (Amphenol) Serial Port E01 D-sub 9 pin male Connector USB-GPIB Converter E02 Use a USB interface. IEEE 24 pin connector (Amphenol). EGPRS Option G03 EGPRS function Accessories Table 3-4 shows the accessories of the Tester. For the specification of the accessories, contact the Agilent Sales Department or an approved distributor. Table 3-4 Accessories Item Name Type Remarks Test SIM card Test Subscriber Identity Module card Shield case N9360A-S01 Built-in PCB antenna-type Frequency Range: 800 to 2000 MHz N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 3-7

38 3 Overview THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-8 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

39 4 Operating Procedures Test Flow 4-2 Preparation for Each Test 4-3 Test Procedure 4-7 Ending a Test 4-99 This chapter describes the preparations required and the operating procedures before starting the test of a GSM Mobile Phone. For the testing method of a W-CDMA Mobile Phone, refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual, and for the testing method of a cdma2000 Mobile Phone, refer to the N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual. Agilent Technologies 4-1

40 4 Operating Procedures Test Flow This section describes a test flow to check the mobile phone with the N9360A GSM Option (G00 Option) and GPRS Option (G03 Option). Figure 4-1 shows the test operation flow. Figure 4-1 Test Flow Subsequently, the mobile phone operation method is described according to the test flow System Requirement Installing the Test SIM Connection Activating the Tester Selection of System GSM Selection of the Function Mode on the Initial Screen WCDMA W-CDMA System Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Automatic Test Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GSM Mode) Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GPRS Mode) Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) Testing a Mobile Phone by TX Analyzer Testing a Mobile Phone by Signal Generator 2.4 Ending a Test 4-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

41 Operating Procedures 4 Preparation for Each Test CAUTION Make sure that the input signal level does not exceed the maximum level allowed. Otherwise, Tester failure may occur. System Requirement The following procedures are required before starting each test. The following equipments are required to set up a test system: The Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester. An RF cable, RF antenna coupler (type N9360A-A02) to connect RF signals from/to the mobile phone under test. A printer and a printer cable if required. Figure 4-2 Typical Test Setup of the Tester Installing the Test SIM Insert the Test Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) provided by the Agilent Technologies in the mobile phone before performing any test because the Tester is not able to perform measurements with a SIM that is provided by the mobile phone operator or other Test SIMs. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-3

42 4 Operating Procedures Connection Connecting a Mobile Phone Connect a mobile phone to the Tester using any of the following methods: Using the Antenna Coupler Connect the Antenna Coupler (type N9360A-A02) connector to the RF IN/OUT connector on the front panel of the Tester. Insert the antenna of the mobile phone into the hole of the Antenna Coupler. Using a User-Supplied RF Cable If you have a cable which connects between the RF port of the mobile phone and the RF IN/OUT connector of the Tester, use it instead of the Antenna Coupler. Using the Shield Case Connect the ANTENNA COUPLER IN/OUT connector of the shield case (type NFG-235) to the RF IN/OUT connector on the front panel of the Tester. Place the mobile phone on the antenna coupler board inside the shield case using the horizontal and vertical holders. Connecting a Printer To print screen hardcopies, if required, connect a printer to the Tester as follows using an appropriate interface cable between the USB connector on the rear panel of the Tester and the USB interface connector of the printer. Use the recommended printer shown below. Also, refer to the manual of the printer for operating the printer. Supported printer (operation confirmed by Agilent): EPSON PM-G N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

43 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-3 Connecting a Printer Connecting a Printer/USB Memory Device To save graphic files of screen in a USB memory device, connect the USB memory device to the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. Graphic files are saved in Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format and with a file name: COPY and the number from 00 to 99 which automatically increases. Connecting a USB-GPIB Converter When you control the Tester using a GP-IB interface, use the USB-GPIB converter (Option E02). Connect the USB-GPIB converter and the USB connector on the rear panel of the Tester with a USB cable. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-5

44 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-4 Connecting a USB-GPIB Converter 4-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

45 Operating Procedures 4 Test Procedure Activating the Tester To activate the Tester, turn on the Line switch on the rear panel of the Tester and press the LINE switch on the front panel. NOTE Provide warm up of 30 minutes or more to ensure correct measurement. General Operation Display Annotation Depending on functions and test situations, there are several types of screen. Figure 4-5 shows the common areas on the typical screen. Figure 4-5 Display Annotation a) Test Flow Automatic Test 1 2 Stand-by /12/31 23:59 b) Test Results 4 5 c) Measurement Item d) Measurement Result e) Input Field 6 Press [Start] to begin a test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-7

46 4 Operating Procedures Table 4-1 Description of the Display Annotation No. Name Description 1 Function Mode Field The current function mode, for example, Automatic Test, Manual Test, TX Analyzer and Configuration, is displayed in this field. 2 Status Display Field The current operation status, for example, Stand-by, Measuring, Test Sequence and Test Condition, is displayed in this field. 3 Date/Time Field The current date and time are displayed in this field. 4 Softkey Menu Field The softkey labels are displayed in this field. Each label defines the function of the corresponding softkey immediately next to the right of the label. 5 Screen Field A variety of information is displayed in this field depending on the operation status. For example, in Automatic Test, the following information is displayed in this field. a) Test Flow: Location Update, MS Call, BS Call, etc. b) Test results: P (pass) or F (fail). c) Measurement Items: Peak TX Power, Frequency Error, etc. d) Measurement Results: Pass/Fail or values. e) Input field: Highlighted fields. 6 Message Field Operation message for test flow steps are displayed in this field. In this field, the word surrounded by bracket [ ] denotes the softkey. Selecting Items and Changing Parameters Depending on the function modes, the Tester has a number of input fields to be specified or defined to configure a test flow, test sequence and test condition. The allowable ranges for those input fields depending on the radio systems are explained in this manual. The summarized information is described in Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges on page A N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

47 Operating Procedures 4 Selecting an Input Field and Specifying a Value All input fields to be specified are highlighted and the circular cursor is shown next to one of them. To start, first select an input field and then specify a value to the input field by the following procedure: Step 1 Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob clockwise to move the cursor downward or right, or rotate it counterclockwise to move it upward or left, and place it next to the input field you want to change. Step 2 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob once. The highlighted input field changes to normal display and circular cursor changes to a triangular one. Step 3 Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob clockwise or counterclockwise to find the values defined for it. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-9

48 4 Operating Procedures Step 4 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to enter the desired value in the input field. The input field is highlighted again and the triangular cursor returns to the circular one. Storing Numeric Values For numeric input fields such as channel numbers and relevancies of amplitude, you can store up to four numeric values into the memory softkey menus with the following procedure: Step 1 Move the cursor to one of the numeric input fields of channels and relevancies of amplitude. Step 2 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to select the field. The softkey menu as Figure 4-6 is displayed on the screen. The four memory softkeys show the values previously stored in the memories if any N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

49 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-6 Value Storage Softkeys Step 3 Set a numeric value in the input field with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 4 Press the Store Value to Memory >> softkey. The softkey menu including Memory 1, Memory 2, Memory 3 and Memory 4 softkeys as shown in Figure 4-7. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-11

50 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-7 Memory Function Step 5 Press either of the memory softkeys from Memory 1 to Memory 4 where you desire to store that value. Step 6 The memory softkey menu returns to the state in Step 2 showing the value newly stored. Step 7 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to set the value into the field. The softkey menu returns to that of Step N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

51 Operating Procedures 4 Step 8 Repeat the procedure from Step 1 to Step 7, if required. Recalling Numeric Values Step 1 Move the cursor to one of the numeric input fields of channels or relevancies of amplitude. Step 2 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to select the field. The softkey menu displayed as shown in Figure 4-8. The four memory softkeys show the values previously stored in the memories if any. Figure 4-8 Value Storage Softkeys N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-13

52 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Press Memory 1, Memory 2, Memory 3 or Memory 4 softkey to enter the stored value to the field. Step 4 The value is entered to the field. Step 5 Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to return the softkey menu to that of Step 1. Changing Magnification Softkey Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to select a numeric input field, such as channels and relevancies of amplitude. A changing magnification softkey as in Figure 4-9 is displayed with memory softkeys. A selected magnification is underlined. Figure 4-9 Changing Magnification Softkey Pressing this softkey changes the multiplier from 1 to Rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob clockwise changes the numeric value in the field by an increment, and counterclockwise changes the value by a decrement. The following multiplies are variable. 1: Increment or decrement by 1. 10: Increment or decrement by : Increment or decrement by : Increment or decrement by N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

53 Operating Procedures 4 Selection of System On this screen, select a system from GSM, W-CDMA or cdma2000. NOTE This N9360A GSM User Manual describes only the GSM system. Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual about the W-CDMA system and N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual for information about the test functions of W-CDMA and cdma2000 systems. Turn on the Tester. The [Top Menu] screen is displayed as Figure Figure 4-10[Top Menu] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-15

54 4 Operating Procedures Step 1 Press the GSM softkey to select the GSM system. The [Initial] screen for GSM is displayed after the Tester completes its initialization and self-test routine. Figure 4-11 [Initial] Screen NOTE When the AutoBoot function is set to "FUNC GSM", "FUNC W-CDMA" or "FUNC CDMA2000", the Tester automatically selects the GSM, W-CDMA or cdma2000 system mode if no softkey is pressed within the specified time (10 to 60 seconds). When the Tester is shipped, the AutoBoot function is set to None. For details, see AutoBoot on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

55 Operating Procedures 4 Selection of the Function Mode on the Initial Screen The Tester executes its initialization and self-test routine after completion of system setting. The [Initial] screen is displayed subsequently. Press one of the softkeys to select a function mode. Figure 4-12 [Initial] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Automatic Test: Starts the Automatic Test. Refer to Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Automatic Test on page Manual Test: Starts the Manual Test. Refer to Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GSM Mode) on page 4-35 for GSM mode, and Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GPRS Mode) on page 4-63 for GPRS mode. TX Analyzer: Starts the TX Analyzer test. Refer to Testing a Mobile Phone by TX Analyzer on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-17

56 4 Operating Procedures Signal Generator: Starts the Signal Generator. Refer to Testing a Mobile Phone by Signal Generator on page More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Config: Goes to the [Configuration] screen to set parameters. Refer to Configuration on page Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the "Printer" setting on the [Configuration] screen. Return to Menu: This softkey is not for selecting a function mode. The screen returns to the [Top Menu] screen when this softkey is pressed. Refer to Return to Menu Screen on page 5-29 for detail. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Correction Actual Input/Output Level and Correction 1 Actual Output Level and Correction in Automatic Test (Except RF test), Manual Test, and Signal Generator Output signal level of the Tester is corrected according to cable loss, coupling loss, and etc. Some of parameters should be set properly. Actual output level (for downlink signal) at the RF IN/OUT connector in the Automatic Test mode (except RF test), the Manual Test mode and the Signal Generator mode is calculated by the following equation. Where, OutputLevel = BsLevel + LossRFOut OutputLevel = Actual output level at the RF IN/OUT connector. BsLevel = Setting value at the BS Level, BER BS Level and BLER BS Level field on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen or the Amplitude field on the [Signal Generator] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

57 Operating Procedures 4 LossRfOut = Setting value at the LOSS/RF Out field on the [Configuration] screen. There is a restriction that the OutputLevel cannot exceed 20.0 dbm, so at each parameter, the BsLevel and the LossRfOut must be set to meet this restriction. 2 Actual Input Signal Level and Correction in Automatic Test (Except RF test), Manual Test, and TX Analyzer Input signal level of the Tester (for uplink signal) is corrected according to cable loss, coupling loss, and etc. Some of parameters should be set properly. The measurement results of RF test in the Manual Test mode and the TX Analyzer mode are corrected by the following equation. InputLevel = MsLevel + LossRFIn Where, InputLevel = Corrected measured value of the Tester. MsLevel = Input signal level of the mobile phone at the RF IN/OUT connector. LossRfIn = Setting value at the LOSS/RF In field on the [Configuration] screen. 3 Actual Output Level and Correction for RF Test in Automatic Test Output signal level of the Tester is corrected according to cable loss, coupling loss, and etc. Some of parameters should be set properly. Actual output level (for downlink signal) at the RF IN/OUT connector for RF test in the Automatic Test mode is calculated by the following equation. Where, OutputLevel = BsLevel + LossRFOut + AttOut N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-19

58 4 Operating Procedures OutputLevel = Actual output level at the RF IN/OUT connector. BsLevel = Setting value at the BS Level, BER BS Level and BLER BS Level field on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. LossRfOut = Setting value at the LOSS/RF Out field on the [Configuration] screen. AttOut = Setting value at the ATT Out field on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. There are two restrictions. The OutputLevel cannot exceed 20.0 dbm, so each parameter, the BsLevel, the LossRfOut and the ATT Out, must be set to meet this restriction. The other restriction is that the sum of the LossRfOut and the ATT Out must be set more than or equal to 0. 4 Actual Input Signal Level and Correction for RF Test in Automatic Test Input signal level of the Tester is corrected according to cable loss, coupling loss, and etc. Some of parameters should be set properly. The measurement results of RF test in the Automatic Test mode are corrected by the following equation. Where, InputLevel = MsLevel + LossRFIn + AttIn InputLevel = Corrected measured value of the Tester. MsLevel = Input signal level of the mobile phone at the RF IN/OUT connector. LossRfIn = Setting value at the LOSS/RF IN field on the [Configuration] screen. AttIn = Setting value at the ATT In field on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. There is a restriction that the sum of the LossRfIn and ATT In must be set more than or equal to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

59 Operating Procedures 4 Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen Determine and enter the loss values caused by the antenna coupler, RF cable, or shield case used to connect the mobile phone to the Tester. If the Loss is set to On, these path loss values are applied to all through the test flow for the radio system being currently tested. Correction of input/output signal is described in Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page Also, refer to page 4-22 for the correction of RF test in Automatic Test. Step 1 Press the GSM softkey on the [Top Menu] screen to activate the GSM system. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for detail. Step 2 Figure 4-13 Press Config > Test Condition > Loss softkeys sequentially from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-21

60 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the Loss field to On with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 4 Enter the appropriate loss values, depending on the radio systems, in the RF In and RF Out fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. These loss values are used all through the test flow. Step 5 Press the Return softkey to return to the [Initial] screen. Entering Channel Attenuations on the Configuration: Test Sequence Screen This section describes correction for RF test results in Automatic Test. Each traffic channel (TCH) path loss can be set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. This is the RF test correction function in addition to the loss function in the [Configuration] screen. In addition to entering the loss values on the [Configuration] screen, you can also enter the attenuation values to be used to correct the RF test results with these values at each traffic channel in the Automatic Test mode. Determine and enter the appropriate attenuation values at each traffic channel with the following procedure, caused by the antenna coupler, RF cable or shield case to connect the mobile phone to the Tester. Step 1 Press the GSM softkey on the [Top Menu] screen to activate GSM system. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for detail N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

61 Operating Procedures 4 Step 2 Press the Config softkey on the [Initial] screen, and then the Test Sequence softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. Figure 4-14 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Step 3 Enter the appropriate attenuation values, depending on the traffic channel, in the ATT In and ATT Out fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. These values are effective for the RF tests in the test flow. Step 4 Press the Return softkey twice to return to the [Initial] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-23

62 4 Operating Procedures Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Automatic Test This section describes the operation method of the Tester and a dual band (GSM900 and DCS1800) mobile phone under the test by Automatic Test. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-15 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-15 [Initial] Screen 4-24 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

63 Operating Procedures 4 Step 3 Press Config > Test Condition > Loss softkeys from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen specifying the Loss field to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-16 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-25

64 4 Operating Procedures Step 4 Press the Return softkey twice, and then the Test Sequence softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen for required setting in Automatic Test. Figure 4-17 [Configuration: Test Sequence 1] Screen 4-26 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

65 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-18 [Configuration: Test Sequence 2] Screen Step 5 Set GSM900 and DCS1800 in Radio System 1 and 2, respectively, and set other fields as shown in Figure 4-17 and Figure Refer to Configuration: Test Sequence Screen on page Step 6 Set Run at test item field which you want to execute in the test flow and measurement item. Step 7 Press the Return and then the Test Condition softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen as Figure 4-19 to set the test condition. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-27

66 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-19 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 8 Set the fields of the test parameters as shown in the left side of Figure 4-19 with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 9 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration(GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] screen as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

67 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-20 [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] screen Step 10 Set appropriate test limits in the cells of the test item table in the right side of Figure Step 11 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 to set the test condition for DCS1800 after replacing GSM900 and DCS1800 in Radio System field. Step 12 Press the Return softkey three times and then the Automatic Test softkey to start Automatic Test. The [Auto Test: Stand-by] screen as Figure 4-21 is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-29

68 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-21 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Screen Step 13 Press the Screen>> softkey to select the display mode. Select Simple, Detail or Value softkey. The following Figure 4-22 is a value screen which will show a measured value for each measurement item N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

69 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-22 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Value Screen Step 14 Press the Start softkey to start a test. A screen status changes from Stand-by to Measuring. Step 15 Turn the mobile phone on. Wait for the mobile phone to camp on, and P is shown at the Location Update step. Step 16 At the MS Call step, make a call from the mobile phone. Dial an arbitrary number and press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-31

70 4 Operating Procedures Step 17 At the Talk step, check the quality of loop back voice and press the Pass or the Fail softkey according to its result. Step 18 As each step is running in the test flow, its corresponding test item field in the table is highlighted. While the RF Test step is blinking, each of the measurement items is measured. So, you can see how it is being done. Step 19 At the MS Release step, press the On Hook button on the mobile phone to finish the call. Step 20 At the BS Call step, press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone to respond to the call from the Tester. Step 21 After the measurement is completed, a [Stand-by] summary screen is displayed to show the test results N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

71 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-23 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Screen Step 22 If a printer is available, print the test results. Press the More (1 of 2), and then the Print Screen softkey to print a screen hardcopy. Step 23 Press the More (2 of 2) softkey to return to the previous softkey menu 1. Step 24 Place the circular cursor at a value, Pass or Fail of any channel in the Burst Timing or Power Ramp cell, for example, then press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen as Figure See where the marker appears in the graph, and the failed result data is shown if any (highlighted in this text). N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-33

72 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-24 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Graph/Value Screen Step 25 Press the Return softkey to return to the summary screen. The Graph/Value screen for other measurement items can be displayed in the same method. Step 26 If you want to repeat the same test again, press the Start softkey N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

73 Operating Procedures 4 Testing a Dual Band Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GSM Mode) This section describes the operation method of the Tester and a dual band (GSM900 and DCS1800) mobile phone under the test by the Manual Test GSM mode. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-25 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-25 [Initial] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-35

74 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config > Test Condition > Loss softkeys from the [Initial] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-26 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Step 4 Press the Test Condition softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for required setting in Manual Test GSM mode N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

75 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-27 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Set the GSM Mode to GSM. Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen (GSM) as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-37

76 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-28 [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Set the appropriate test limits in the cells of the test item table in the right side of the Figure Step 8 Press the Return softkey three times and then press the Manual Test softkey to start Manual Test. The [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen (GSM) as Figure 4-29 is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

77 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-29 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) Step 9 Turn the mobile phone on and wait for it to camp on, and P is shown at the Location Update step. Step 10 Start MS Call or BS Call with the following operation. Dial an arbitrary number and press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone. Press the BS Call softkey to start BS Call. Press Off Hook button on the mobile phone to respond to the call from the Tester. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-39

78 4 Operating Procedures Step 11 After MS call or BS call starts, the screen as Figure 4-30 is displayed. P is shown at the MS Call or BS Call step, and Connection is highlighted. Figure 4-30 [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) Step 12 When the Connection step succeeded, the Tester waits for the trigger. If the trigger mode is set to Cont (continuous), continuous measurement starts immediately. If the trigger mode is set to Sing (single), press the Trigger softkey to start single measurement. Until measurement starts, the Tester loops back the voice from the mobile phone. Until measurement starts, the Tester loops back the voice from the mobile phone N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

79 Operating Procedures 4 Step 13 After the measurement is completed, a [Measuring] summary screen containing test results is displayed. Figure 4-31 [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GSM) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-41

80 4 Operating Procedures Step 14 Select a group of measurement items with the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen. Place the cursor at Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob, for example, to display Figure Figure 4-32 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/ Value Screen (GSM) Step 15 Press a softkey as needed. Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the cursor or the marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measurement trace N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

81 Operating Procedures 4 Zoom Off/On: Selects the zoom mode from On and Off. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement starts after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. Trigger: Starts single measurement when the trigger mode is set to Sing. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves it in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off : Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator "CDT OFF" appears at the left lower corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-43

82 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-33 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (GSM) Step 16 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 17 Start Spectrum measurement. Press the More (1of 3) and the Spectrum Monitor softkey to display the Spectrum Monitor screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

83 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-34 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GSM) Step 18 Start the measurement. Press the Trigger softkey to measure spectrum in single mode or the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to measure the spectrum in continuous mode. Step 19 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-45

84 4 Operating Procedures Step 20 Terminate the call. BS release: Press the Release softkey. MS release: Press the On Hook button on the mobile phone. After the release process is completed, the screen will return to the [Stand-by] screen. You can also display a Graph/Value screen from the [Stand-by] screen. Figure 4-35 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result (GSM) 4-46 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

85 Operating Procedures 4 Handover Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-36 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-36 [Initial] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-47

86 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and then Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-37 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-48 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

87 Operating Procedures 4 Step 4 Press the Return softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for required setting in Manual Test GSM mode. Figure 4-38 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen (GSM) as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-49

88 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-39 [Configuration(GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Set the appropriate test limits in the cells of the test item table in the right side of the Figure 4-39 Step 8 Press the Return softkey three times and then press the Manual Test softkey to start Manual Test. The [Manual Test: Stand-by] (GSM) screen as Figure 4-40 is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

89 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-40 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) Step 9 Turn the mobile phone on and P is shown at the Location Update step. Step 10 Start BS Call or MS Call with the following operation. Dial an arbitrary number and press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone. Press the BS Call softkey to start BS Call. Press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone to respond to the call from the Tester. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-51

90 4 Operating Procedures Step 11 After MS call or BS Call starts, the screen as Figure 4-41 is displayed. P is shown in the MS Call, BS Call and Connection step is highlighted. Figure 4-41 [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Screen (GSM) Step 12 When the Connection step succeeded, the Tester waits for the trigger. If the trigger mode is set to Cont (continuous), continuous measurement starts immediately. If the trigger mode is set to Sing (single), press the Trigger softkey to start single measurement. Until measurement starts, the Tester loops back the voice from the mobile phone N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

91 Operating Procedures 4 Step 13 After the measurement is completed, a [Measuring] summary screen containing test results is displayed. Figure 4-42 [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GSM) Step 14 Change the channel with the following operation. Move the cursor to TCH input field and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob to select the channel for handover. Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Then, the Handover step is highlighted and the channel changes to the selected channel. When handover is completed, P is shown at the Handover step. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-53

92 4 Operating Procedures Step 15 Terminate the call. BS release: Press the Release softkey. MS release: Press the On Hook button on the mobile phone After the release process is completed, the screen will return to the [Stand-by] screen. You can also display a [Graph/Value] screen from the [Stand-by] screen. Figure 4-43 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (GSM) 4-54 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

93 Operating Procedures 4 Emergency Call NOTE To test the emergency call function, place the mobile phone and the Tester where the radio signal (electromagnetic wave) from base station of a cell phone operator does not propagate, such as in a shield room, an anechoic chamber, and so forth. Execute the test of emergency call without any SIM. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-44 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-44 [Initial] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-55

94 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and the Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-45 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-56 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

95 Operating Procedures 4 Step 4 Press the Return softkey to display the [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition] screen for required setting in Manual Test GSM mode. Figure 4-46 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Set the GSM Mode to GSM. Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration(GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] screen as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-57

96 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-47 [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Set the appropriate test limits in the cells of the test item table in the right side of the Figure 4-47 Step 8 Press the Return softkey three times and then the Manual Test softkey to start Manual Test. The [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen as Figure 4-48 is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

97 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-48 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GSM) Step 9 Turn the mobile phone on. Step 10 Dial an emergency call number and press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone to start MS Call. Step 11 After MS call starts, the screen as Figure 4-49 will be displayed. Emergency Call is displayed at the Dialed No.: field on the screen. P is shown in the MS Call and Connection is highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-59

98 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-49 [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Emergency Call Screen (GSM) If the trigger mode is set to Cont (continuous), continuous measurement starts immediately. If the trigger mode is set to Sing (single), press the Trigger softkey to start single measurement. Until measurement starts, the Tester loops back the voice from the mobile phone. Step 12 After the measurement is completed, a [Measuring] summary screen containing test results is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

99 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-50 [Manual Test: Measuring] Emergency Measurement Result Screen (GSM) Step 13 Terminate the call. BS release: Press the Release softkey MS release: Press the On Hook button on the mobile phone to start MS release. After the release process is completed, the screen will return to the [Stand-by] screen. You can also display a Graph/Value screen from the [Stand-by] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-61

100 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-51 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen(GSM) 4-62 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

101 Operating Procedures 4 Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (GPRS Mode) This section describes the operation method of the Tester and a mobile phone under the test by the Manual Test GPRS mode. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-52 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-52 [Initial] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-63

102 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and the Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-53 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen 4-64 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

103 Operating Procedures 4 Step 4 Press the Return softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for required setting in Manual Test GPRS mode. Figure 4-54 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Set the GSM Mode to GPRS. Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration(GPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] screen as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-65

104 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-55 [Configuration (GPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Set appropriate test limits in the cells of the test items as shown in Figure Step 8 Press the Return softkey three times and then press the Manual Test softkey to start Manual Test. The [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen as Figure 4-56 displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

105 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-56 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GPRS) Step 9 Make sure that the Function mode field on the top left of the screen shows Manual Test (GPRS): Stand-by. Step 10 Specify the input fields of the test parameters as shown in Figure Step 11 Turn the mobile phone on and wait for it to camp on, and P is shown in the Attach step. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-67

106 4 Operating Procedures Step 12 Upon completion of the attaching process, the [Manual Test: Measuring] screen is displayed as shown in Figure Figure 4-57 [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (GPRS) Step 13 When the attached step succeeded, the Tester waits for the trigger. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement will start after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. The [Manual Test: Measuring] connected screen is displayed as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

107 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-58 [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (GPRS) Step 14 During continuous measurement, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing to terminate the measurement. Upon completion of the measurement at the Connected step, the step proceeds to the Disconnect step. Step 15 The screen automatically changes to a [Stand-by] summary screen containing test results. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-69

108 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-59 [Manual Test: Measuring] Summary Screen (GPRS) Step 16 Select a group of measurement items with the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen. Place the cursor at Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob, for example, to display the Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

109 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-60 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Screen (GPRS) Step 17 Press a softkey as needed. Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the cursor or the marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measurement trace. Zoom Off/On: Selects the zoom mode from On and Off. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement starts after the Trigger softkey is pressed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-71

110 4 Operating Procedures To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. Trigger: Starts single measurement when the trigger mode is set to Sing. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves it in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator "CDT OFF" appears at the left lower corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Figure 4-61 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (GPRS) 4-72 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

111 Operating Procedures 4 Step 18 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 19 Press the More (1 of 3) and the Spectrum Monitor softkey to display the Spectrum Monitor screen. Figure 4-62 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-73

112 4 Operating Procedures Step 20 Press the Trigger softkey to measure spectrum in single mode, or the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to measure the spectrum in continuous mode. Step 21 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 22 Press the End softkey to finish the test. Testing a Mobile Phone by Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) This section describes the operation method of the Tester and a mobile phone under the test by the Manual Test EGPRS mode. NOTE Install the Option G03 before using EGPRS function. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-63 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

113 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-63 [Initial] Screen Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and the Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-75

114 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-64 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)Configuration] Screen Step 4 Press the Return softkey to display the [Configuration (EGPRS): Test Condition] screen for required setting in Manual Test EGPRS mode N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

115 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-65 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Set the GSM Mode to EGPRS. Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration(EGPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] screen as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-77

116 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-66 [Configuration (EGPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Set appropriate test limits in the cells of the test items as shown in Figure Step 8 Press the Return softkey thrice and then press the Manual Test softkey to start Manual Test. The [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen as Figure 4-67 is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

117 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-67 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (EGPRS) Step 9 Be sure that the Function mode field on the top left of the screen shows [Manual Test (EGPRS): Stand-by]. Step 10 Specify the input fields of the test parameters as shown in Figure Step 11 Turn the mobile phone on and wait for it to camp on, and P is shown in the Attach step. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-79

118 4 Operating Procedures Step 12 Upon completion of the attaching process, the [Manual Test: Measuring] screen is displayed as shown in Figure Figure 4-68 [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (EGPRS) 4-80 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

119 Operating Procedures 4 Step 13 When the attached process succeeded, the Tester waits for the trigger. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement will start after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. The [Manual Test: Measuring] connected screen is displayed as Figure Figure 4-69 [Measuring] Connected Screen (EGPRS Mode) Step 14 During continuous measurement, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing to terminate the measurement. Upon completion of the measurement at the Connected step, the step proceeds to the Disconnect step. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-81

120 4 Operating Procedures Step 15 The screen automatically changes to a [Measuring] summary screen containing test results. Figure 4-70 [Manual Test: Measuring] Measurement Result Screen (EGPRS) 4-82 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

121 Operating Procedures 4 Step 16 Select a group of measurement items with the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen. Place the cursor at Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob, for example, to display the Figure Figure 4-71 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Screen (EGPRS) Step 17 Press a softkey as needed. Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the cursor or the marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-83

122 4 Operating Procedures marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measurement trace. Zoom Off/On: Selects the zoom mode from On and Off. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement starts after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. Trigger: Starts single measurement when the trigger mode is set to Sing. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves it in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator "CDT OFF" appears at the left lower corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

123 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-72 [Manual Test: Measuring] Graph/Value Zoomed Screen (EGPRS) Step 18 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 19 Press the More (1 of 3) and the Spectrum Monitor softkey to display the Spectrum Monitor screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-85

124 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-73 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (EGPRS) Step 20 Press the Trigger softkey to measure spectrum in single mode, or the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to measure the spectrum in continuous mode. Step 21 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 22 Press the End softkey to finish the test N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

125 Operating Procedures 4 Testing a Mobile Phone by TX Analyzer This section describes the operation method of the Tester for a test by the TX Analyzer. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-74 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-74 [Initial] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-87

126 4 Operating Procedures Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and the Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-75 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Step 4 Press the Return softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen to set the test condition N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

127 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-76 [Configuration: Test Condition] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields of the test parameter as shown in Figure Step 6 Press the Limit softkey to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen as Figure N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-89

128 4 Operating Procedures Figure 4-77 [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Step 7 Enter appropriate test limits in the cells of the test item table on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Step 8 Press the Return softkey thrice and the TX Analyzer softkey to display the [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

129 Operating Procedures 4 Figure 4-78 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Step 9 Set the mobile phone to transmit the bursted RF signal. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-91

130 4 Operating Procedures Step 10 Start a test with the following softkey operation. Trigger Sing/Cont: When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement will start after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. When the trigger mode is Cont, continuous measurement starts as soon as the [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] screen is displayed. Trigger: Starts single measurement. Step 11 During continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to terminate continuous measurement. A summary screen showing measurement result is displayed. Figure 4-79 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Summary Screen 4-92 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

131 Operating Procedures 4 Step 12 Select a group of measurement items with the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen. Place the cursor at Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob, for example, to display Figure Figure 4-80 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Graph/Value Screen Step 13 Press a softkey as needed. Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the cursor or the marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measurement trace. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-93

132 4 Operating Procedures Zoom Off/On: Selects the zoom mode from On and Off. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. When the trigger mode is Sing, single measurement starts after the Trigger softkey is pressed. To change the trigger mode to Cont in order to start continuous measurement, press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey. Trigger: Starts single measurement when the trigger mode is set to Sing. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves it in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Figure 4-81 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Graph/Value Zoom Screen 4-94 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

133 Operating Procedures 4 Step 14 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Step 15 Press the More (1 of 2) and the Spectrum Monitor softkey to display the Spectrum Monitor screen. Figure 4-82 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Screen Step 16 Press the Trigger softkey to measure spectrum in single mode, or the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to measure the spectrum in continuous mode. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-95

134 4 Operating Procedures Step 17 Press the Return softkey to return to the previous screen. Testing a Mobile Phone by Signal Generator This section describes the operation method of the Tester for a test by the Signal Generator. Step 1 Turn on the Tester and select the GSM system on the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Selection of System on page 4-15 for selecting a system. Step 2 The [Initial] screen as Figure 4-83 is displayed after completion of initialization and self-test routine of the Tester. Figure 4-83 [Initial] Screen 4-96 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

135 Operating Procedures 4 Step 3 Set the path loss value. Press the Config, Test Condition and the Loss softkey from the [Initial] screen to display the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to specify the loss value. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page Figure 4-84 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-97

136 4 Operating Procedures Step 4 Press the Return three times and then press the Signal Generator softkey on the [Initial] screen. The [Signal Generator] screen as Figure 4-85 is displayed. Figure 4-85 [Signal Generator] Screen Step 5 Set the input fields. Step 6 Press the RF Output On/Off softkey to change On/Off state from Off to On for transmitting RF signal to the mobile phone. Step 7 Press the RF Output On/Off softkey again to change On/Off state from On to Off for ending the test N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

137 Operating Procedures 4 Ending a Test CAUTION Do not turn off the Line switch on the rear panel of the Tester while the LINE LED on the front panel of the Tester is lit in green. Otherwise, Tester failure may occur. Disconnecting the Mobile Phone Disconnect the mobile phone from the connection cable or the antenna coupler. Remove the Test SIM card from the mobile phone. Turning off the Tester Turn off the Tester with the following procedure: Step 1 Press the LINE switch on the front panel of the Tester for more than one second. Step 2 The display blacks out, and the LINE LED on the front panel is lit in orange. Step 3 The power is turned off except the reference oscillator in the Tester. Step 4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 4-99

138 4 Operating Procedures Turn off the Line switch on the rear panel of the Tester to turn off the reference oscillator. Step 5 Every power including the reference oscillator is turned off and the LINE LED goes off N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

139 5 Screen Reference Screen Flow Chart 5-2 Top Menu Screen 5-3 Configuration Screen 5-6 Firmware Update Screen 5-13 Update Flash Screen 5-18 Return to Menu Screen 5-29 Automatic Test 5-33 Measuring Screen 5-42 Manual Test (GSM Mode) 5-68 Manual Test (GPRS Mode) Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) TX Analyzer Signal Generator Configuration In this chapter, each screen of the Tester is explained in detail including the operational features and the functional softkeys activated in each screen. Agilent Technologies 5-1

140 5 Screen Reference Screen Flow Chart Figure 5-1 Screen Flow Chart The following Figure 5-1 shows the screen flow chart for each function mode. Each rectangle represents one screen with a different function mode, measuring step and status, measurement results and so forth. Top Menu Configuration Firmware Update Select "W-CDMA" Refer to the Agilent N9360A W-CDMA User Manual Initial Screen Select "GSM" Automatic Test Stand-by Value Stand-by Detail Stand-by Simple Sensitivity/ RX Auality/ RX Level Phase Error Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Peak TX Power Measuring Value Measuring Detail Measuring Simple Manual Test (GSM, GPRS, EGPRS) Stand-by Measuring TX Analyzer Spectrum Monitor ORFS SMS Frequency Error EVM Origin Offset Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Phase Error Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp ORFS Stand-by Measuring Signal Generator Signal Generator Configuration Spectrum Monitor Phase Error Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Frequency Error EVM Origin Offset Configuration Test Sequence Test Condition File Management 5-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

141 Screen Reference 5 Top Menu Screen After power on, the [Top Menu] screen as Figure 5-2 is displayed. This screen is used to select a system or the [Configuration] screen. The system options are GSM and W- CDMA. Figure 5-2 Selectable Systems Menu GSM W-CDMA cdma2000 Configuration Firmware Update NOTE This N9360A GSM User Manual describes only the GSM system. Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual about the W-CDMA system and N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual for information about the cdma2000 system. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-3

142 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-3 [Top Menu] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 GSM: Selects the GSM system. After the system is selected, the Tester is automatically rebooted, and then displays the [Initial] screen for GSM system. This softkey is activated when the GSM system is installed in the Tester. WCDMA: Selects the W-CDMA system. After the system is selected, the Tester is automatically rebooted, and then displays the [Initial] screen for W-CDMA system. This softkey is activated when the W-CDMA system is installed in the Tester. CDMA2000: Selects the cdma2000 system. After the system is selected, the Tester is automatically rebooted, and then displays the [Initial] screen for cdma2000 system. This softkey is activated when the cdma2000 system is installed in the Tester. 5-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

143 Screen Reference 5 Config: Displays the [Configuration] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves an image file of the screen into a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Reboot: Aborts a current system and returns to the [Top Menu] screen after reboots the Tester. More (2 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. NOTE When the AutoBoot function is set to FUNC GSM, FUNC W-CDMA or FUNC CDMA2000, the Tester automatically selects the GSM, W-CDMA or cdma2000 system mode, if no softkey is pressed within the specified time (10 to 60 seconds). When the Tester is shipped, the AutoBoot function is set to None. For details, see AutoBoot on page 5-9. Screen Field The firmware name, revision number currently installed, and serial number are shown. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field: Select a Radio System or Configuration. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-5

144 5 Screen Reference Configuration Screen When the Config softkey is pressed on the [Top Menu] screen, the [Configuration] screen as Figure 5-4 is displayed. If the Option E00 and Option E02 are not installed, the screen looks like Figure 5-5; if the Option E01 is not installed, the screen looks like Figure 5-6. The following various conditions are set on this screen. Reference signal internal/external changing External control relevant to I/F Date and Time Printer Key confirmation beep Automatic Boot Option Install Figure 5-4 [Configuration] Screen 5-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

145 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves it in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. FW Update: Displays the [Firmware Update] screen. Network Setting: Displays the [Network Setting] screen. Option Install: Used for installation of an option function such as G00 (preinstalled option) and G03 (preinstalled option). Option Backup: Backs up the installed option functions. Return: Returns to the [Top Menu] screen. If the Option E00 and Option E02 are not installed, setting items for GP-IB are grayed out (disabled) as shown in Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Part of [Configuration] screen (without Option E00) When the Option E01 is not installed, setting items for the the serial port are grayed out (disabled) as Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 Part of [Configuration] screen (without Option E01) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-7

146 5 Screen Reference Screen Field The following input fields need to be set to use the Tester according to the following description of Table 5-1. Table 5-1 [Configuration] Screen Input Field Input Field Reference Serial Port GP-IB * Terminator Printer Beeper Description Selects a reference signal from Internal and External. Internal: The internal 10 MHz reference signal is used. External: The external 10 MHz reference signal is used. The external 10 MHz reference signal must be supplied to the 10MHz Reference IN connector on the rear panel. Sets the communication condition of the serial port (RS-232C) to use remote control. The option E01 is required to use this function. Baud Rate: Sets communication speed to 9600, 19200, 38400, or bits per second. Data Length: Sets data length to 7 or 8 bits. Stop Bits: Sets stop bit length to 1, 1.5 or 2 bits. Parity: Sets parity check mode to None, Odd or Even. Xcontrol: Sets flow control to None or Xon/Xoff. Sets the communication condition of the GP-IB port to use remote control. The option E00 or option E02 is required to use this function. Addr: Sets the GP-IB address. The allowable range is from 1 to 15. EOI: Sets EOI control. Select On or Off. On: Enables EOI control. (Terminator setting is ignored). Off: Disables EOI control. (Terminator setting is ignored). Reboot the Tester after changing GP-IB setting. Sets the terminator of output text data to CR, LF or CR+LF. This setting is used for remote control with serial interface, Ethernet and GP-IB. The Terminator of input text data for: GPIB option E00: set to CR+LF GPIB option E02: set to LF Sets the destination to which the print data is sent to USB Memory or EPSON PM-G800 when the Print Screen softkey is pressed. USB Memory: Saves the image of the screen into a USB memory device. The image format is PNG (Portable Network Graphics). EPSON PM-G800: Prints a hardcopy of the screen with the specified printer. Sets beep. Selects On or Off. On: Beeps for each step of operation. Off: Beeps only for noticing some errors and warnings. 5-8 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

147 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-1 [Configuration] Screen Input Field Input Field AutoBoot Date/ Time * Option Install Description Specifies the system for automatic boot when a certain time (time-out period) has passed since the [Top Menu] screen was displayed. Application: Selects the system from the followings: None: No automatic boot occurs FUNC GSM: Boots the GSM option FUNC WCDMA: Boots the W-CDMA option Timer: Sets the timeout from 10 to 60 seconds, or. The timer is stopped if any softkey is pressed. : Disables the setting for the time out timer. 10 to 60: Sets the time-out timer. Sets the current date and time in the following formats: YYYY: Sets the year. The allowable range is from 1990 to MM: Sets the month. The allowable range is from 01 to 12. DD: Sets the day. The allowable range is from 01 to 31. HH: Sets the hour. The allowable range is from 00 to 23. MM: Sets the minute. The allowable range is from 00 to 59. Installs Option. Set 16-digit option key and press Option Install softkey install an option. When using this function, do not insert a USB memory device. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Changing Magnification Softkey on page Also, the following information is shown in the screen field: Serial number. Revision number of RF CPU software. Revision number of MC-1x CPU software. (Only when the C00 and C01 options are installed.) Revision number of 1xEV-DO CPU software. (Only when the C00, C01 and C02 option are installed.) Options that are already installed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-9

148 5 Screen Reference Option Installation/Backup On the [Configuration] screen, you can install/back up option functions such as C01, C02, W00 and G00. NOTE To install options, a suitable option key for the option is required. For further information, contact the Agilent Sales Department or an authorized distributor. Option Installation There are two way to install option functions to the Tester. One is by using a USB memory device and the other is by not using a USB memory device. Using a USB memory Device Prepare a USB memory device which contains an option key. Step 1 Press the Config softkey on the [Top Menu] screen to display the [Configuration] screen. Step 2 Insert USB memory device which contains the option key into the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. Step 3 Press the Option Install softkey. Step 4 The option number is now added into the Option field in the information field. Remove the memory device from the tester N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

149 Screen Reference 5 Not Using a USB memory Device To install Option function, prepare the 16-digit option key. Do not insert a USB memory device to the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. Step 1 Press the Config softkey on the [Top Menu] screen to display the [Configuration] screen. Step 2 Set the 16-digit option key to the Option Install field with the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 3 Press the Option Install softkey. Step 4 The option number is added into the Option field in the information field. Option Backup Prepare a USB memory device before backup the option information. Step 1 Press the Config softkey on the [Top Menu] screen to display the [Configuration] screen. Step 2 Insert USB memory device containing the Option Key into the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-11

150 5 Screen Reference Step 3 Press the Option Backup softkey. Step 4 Confirm Option Backup complete! message appears on the Message field of the screen, and remove the USB memory device from the tester N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

151 Screen Reference 5 Firmware Update Screen The Tester provides three methods to update the firmware: USB (installs the firmware files placed in the USB memory device which is connected to the Tester), HDD (installs the firmware files placed in the Tester's internal HDD), SERVER (installs the firmware files placed on the external server). You can select one method by setting the Update Type to either of USB, HDD, and SERVER. When using the USB, copy the firmware files into the USB memory device, then insert the USB memory device to the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. When using the HDD, copy the firmware files under the directory specified below in the Tester's internal HDD. To copy the files into the Tester, you may connect an external PC to the Tester via Ethernet, and copy the files on the external PC to the Tester by using a ftp utility software. Use the account name and the password specified below for the ftp connection. Account name: ftpuser Password: ftp Directory to save the files: /ftp When using the external server, prepare the external server on which the destination firmware files are placed under the directory specified below. Create the account name with the password specified below on the external server in advance to allow the Tester to establish the ftp connection by using them. Account name: n9360a Password: n9360a Directory to save the files: /n9360a/ftpserver The IP address of the external server needs to be configured in the Tester by using the external remote commands. For details of the commands, refer to GSM Option Programmer's Guide. Press the Config softkey on the [Top Menu] screen, then press the FW Update softkey to display the [Firmware Update] screen as shown in Figure 5-7. The following information is displayed on this screen: Update Type: Displays the selected method to update the firmware: USB, HDD, or SERVER. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-13

152 5 Screen Reference Revision: Displays the current firmware revision in the Tester and the revision of the firmware files placed at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type.?.??.??: Indicates that there is no firmware files at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type : Indicates that the firmware is not installed in the Tester. (complete): Indicates that the firmware is updated successfully. It is displayed in the Update Version display area. Figure 5-7 [Firmware Update] Screen 5-14 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

153 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Update Menu: Updates the Top Menu functions. Press this softkey to update the Top Menu functions after placing the firmware files of the Top Menu functions at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. Restart the Tester after updating the Top Menu functions. Update Func Tester: Updates Functions Tester functions. Press this softkey to update the Function Tester functions after placing the firmware files of the Function Test functions at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Return to the [Configuration] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves the screen image in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Update SYSTEM: Updates the System functions. Press this softkey to update the System functions after placing the firmware files of the System functions at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. After updating the System functions, restarting the Tester may be required, depending on the type of update. Update Flash: Displays the [Update Flash] Screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-15

154 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu 3 Clear HDD File: Deletes all firmware files at the file storage area specified by the Update Type of HDD. This softkey is available only when selecting HDD as the Update Type. Reload List: Updates and displays the list of the firmware files placed at the file storage area specified by the Update Type of SERVER. This softkey is available only when selecting SERVER as the Update Type. Update Type: Set the Update Type to either of USB, HDD, and SERVER. Pressing this softly changes the Update Type from USB to HDD, from HDD to SERVER, from SERVER to USB, sequentially. More (3 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Message Field Depending on the situation, the following messages are displayed: Press [Update xxxx] to update. ("xxxx") This message is displayed when the available firmware files exists at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. Press [Update System] to update. ("xxxx") This message is displayed when the available firmware files exist at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. System condition error. Please execute system update. USB memory is not inserted. USB memory is accessed now. [ Don't remove a USB memory! ] No update files exists in the inserted USB memory device. No update file exists. Cannot get file-list from ftp server. Processing [Don't remove a USB memory!] Processing Completed! Completed! ("xxxx") 5-16 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

155 Screen Reference 5 FW-Update failed [Error number] NOTE Before pressing the FW Update softkey, make sure that the appropriate firmware files are placed at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-17

156 5 Screen Reference Update Flash Screen The Tester provides three methods to update the firmware: USB (installs the firmware files placed in the USB memory device which is connected to the Tester), HDD (installs the firmware files placed in the Tester's internal HDD), SERVER (installs the firmware files placed on the external server). You can select one method by setting the Update Type to either of USB, HDD, and SERVER. When using the USB, copy the firmware files into the USB memory device, then insert the USB memory device to the USB connector on the front panel of the Tester. When using the HDD, copy the firmware files under the directory specified below in the Tester's internal HDD. To copy the files into the Tester, you may connect an external PC to the Tester via Ethernet, and copy the files on the external PC to the Tester by using a ftp utility software. Use the account name and the password specified below for the ftp connection. Account name: ftpuser Password: ftp Directory to save the files: /ftp When using the external server, prepare the external server on which the destination firmware files are placed under the directory specified below. Create the account name with the password specified below on the external server in advance to allow the Tester to establish the ftp connection by using them. Account name: n9360a Password: n9360a Directory to save the files: /n9360a/ftpserver The IP address of the external server needs to be configured in the Tester by using the external remote commands. For details of the commands, refer to GSM Option Programmer's Guide. Press the Config softkey on the [Top Menu] screen, then press the FW Update > More(1 of 3) > Update Flash softkeys to display the [Update Flash] screen as shown in Figure 5-8. The following information is displayed on this screen: Update Type: Displays the selected method to update the firmware: USB, HDD, or SERVER N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

157 Screen Reference 5 Revision: Displays the current firmware revision in the Tester and the revision of the firmware files placed at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type.?.??.??: Indicates that there is no firmware files at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type : Indicates that the firmware is not installed in the Tester. (complete): Indicates that the firmware is updated successfully. It is displayed in the Update Version display area. Figure 5-8 [Update Flash] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-19

158 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Update MC-1x: Updates the MC-1x functions. Press this softkey to update the MC-1x functions after placing the firmware files of the MC-1x functions at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. Update 1xEV-DO: Updates the 1xEV-DO functions. Press this softkey to update the 1xEV-DO functions after placing the firmware files of the 1xEV-DO functions at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Return to the [Firmware Updater] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen : Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the Printer field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2) : Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Message Field Depending on the situation, the following messages are displayed: Press [Update xxxx] to update. ("xxxx") This massage is displayed when the available firmware files exists at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. USB memory is not inserted. No update files exists in the inserted USB memory device. No update file exists. Cannot get file-list from ftp server. Processing [Don't remove a USB memory!] 5-20 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

159 Screen Reference 5 Completed! FW-Update failed [Error number] NOTE Before pressing the Update Flash softkey, make sure that the appropriate firmware files are placed at the file storage area specified by the selected Update Type. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-21

160 5 Screen Reference Network Setting Screen On the [Network Setting] screen, you can configure network settings. When the Network Setting softkey on the [Configuration] screen is pressed, the [Network Setting] Screen as Figure 3.9 is displayed. This screen allows you to configure the following settings: IP Address CIDR (Subnet Mask) Gateway Figure 5-9 [Network Setting] Screen 5-22 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

161 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the Printer field on the [Configuration] screen. Apply Address: Applies the changes of IP Addr, Mask, Default Gateway, Host/Net, Gateway and CIDR to the Tester. This softkey is not activated when the [Network Setting] screen is displayed and no setting is changed. This softkey is activated when any input field is changed. After applying the settings, this softkey is inactivated again. Cancel : Returns to the [Configuration] screen. Values changed before pressing the Apply Address softkey are reverted to the former values. Screen Field The following input fields need to be set to use the Tester according to the following description of Table 5-2. Table 5-2 [Network Setting] Screen Input Field Input Field IP Addr CIDR (Mask) Description Sets the IP address of the Tester. Allowable setting value is as follows: to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The default IP address is " ". If the IP address setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. Changes to the IP address is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Sets the subnet mask in CIDR format. Allowable setting value is as follows: 1 to 31 The default mask value is 24 ( ). If the mask value setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. Changes to the mask setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Refer to Appendix A on page A-1 for details. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-23

162 5 Screen Reference Table 5-2 [Network Setting] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Default Gateway Description Sets active or inactive of the Default Gateway setting, and sets the Default Gateway address. The allowable settings are as follows: None: Default Gateway setting is inactivated. ACT: Default Gateway setting is activated. When None is selected, the address setting field is grayed out and inactivated to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The Default Gateway setting is valid when you set the allowable Default Gateway address, and the Tester and the Default Gateway belong to the same network. When the Tester and Default Gateway do not belong to the same network, "Unreachable" is displayed in the Status field because the routing from the Tester cannot be resolved. If the Default Gateway is set to "None" when booting, the address is displayed as ( ), which means invalid. When the Default Gateway setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. The Default Gateway setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Setting 1 to 5 Host/Net Sets Act/None (active/inactive) of gateway settings from 1 to 5. The allowable setting is as follows: None: The Gateway setting is inactivated. ACT: The Gateway setting is activated. The Gateway setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. When None is selected, the address setting field is grayed out and unavailable. Sets the destination host or network addresses for gateway setting from 1 to 5. Allowable settings are as follows: When Host address is specified (When the CIDR is set to None.): to (From to are unavailable to setting.) When Network address is specified (When the CIDR is not set to None): to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). When the Gateway setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. The Host/Net setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. If the CIDR is set to None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as a host address. If the CIDR is set to value other than None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as the network address. In this case, the address of Host part is set to 0. If it specifies the value other than 0, Invalid is displayed in the Status field. The address setting is automatically changed to when the address was set to and the Host/Net setting is changed from network to host N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

163 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-2 [Network Setting] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Gateway CIDR Description Sets the Gateway addresses for gateway setting from 1 to 5. Allowable settings are as follows: to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The gateway setting is valid when you set the allowable address, and the Tester and the Gateway belong to the same network. If the Gateway is set to None when booting, the address is displayed as ( ), which means invalid. When the Tester and Gateway do not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed in the Status field. The Gateway setting is effective after the pressing the Apply Address softkey. Sets the subnet masks for the destination address in CIDR format from Setting 1 to 5. Allowable setting values are as follows: None or 1 to 31 When the CIDR is set to None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as a host address. When the CIDR is set to value other than None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as network address. If the Gateway setting is disabled when booting, None is displayed in the CIDR field. Changes to the mask setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Refer to Appendix A on page A-1 for details. *For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page In addition, this screen displays the following information: MAC address Status: Shows how each address is configured. If any abnormality is detected in the IP Addr/Mask setting, Invalid is displayed. If any abnormality is detected in the Default Gateway setting, Invalidis displayed. If the Tester and the Default Gateway does not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed. If any abnormality is detected in the Gateway setting, Invalid is displayed. If the Tester and the gateway do not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-25

164 5 Screen Reference Initial Screen When the GSM softkey on the [Top Menu] screen is pressed, the [Initial] Screen as Figure 5-10 is displayed. This screen allows you to select a mode and return to the [Top Menu] screen. To return to the [Initial] screen from any function mode, press the Return softkey (multiple times if necessary). Figure 5-10 [Initial] Screen 5-26 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

165 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Automatic Test: Displays the [Auto Test: Stand-by] screen. Refer to Automatic Test on page Manual Test: Displays the [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen. Refer to Manual Test (GSM Mode) on page 5-68, or Manual Test (GPRS Mode) on page TX Analyzer: Displays the [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] screen. Refer to TX Analyzer on page Signal Generator: Displays the [Signal Generator] screen. Refer to Signal Generator on page More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Config: Displays the [Configuration] screen. Refer to Configuration on page Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the Printer field on the [Configuration] screen. Return to Menu: Displays the screen to return to the [Top Menu] screen. Refer to Return to Menu Screen on page More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The firmware name and revision number currently installed are displayed. The current CDMA mode is also displayed. Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-3. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-27

166 5 Screen Reference Table 5-3 [Initial] Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Current System Description Displays a list of up to four parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Displays a system being run. Select the test mode from GSM, W-CDMA or CDMA2000. W-CDMA is valid when the W00 option is installed. CDMA2000 is valid when the C00 option, C01 option and C02 option (1xEV-DO) is installed. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field: Select a Test Mode or Configuration N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

167 Screen Reference 5 Return to Menu Screen When the Return to Menu softkey is pressed on the [Initial] screen, the [Return to Menu] Screen as in Figure 5-11 is displayed. Figure 5-11 [Return to Menu] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu OK: Returns to the [Top Menu] screen. Cancel: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Screen Field The following message is displayed in the screen field: To reboot the instrument is necessary for returning to the menu. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-29

168 5 Screen Reference PRESET Screen When the PRESET button on the front panel of the Tester is pressed before selecting the system, the PRESET Screen (Menu) as in Figure 5-12 is displayed. Figure 5-12 PRESET Screen (Menu) 5-30 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

169 Screen Reference 5 When the PRESET button on the front panel of the Tester is pressed after selecting GSM system, the PRESET Screen (GSM) as in Figure 5-13 is displayed. Figure 5-13 PRESET Screen (GSM) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-31

170 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Factory Default: All the parameters of the Tester other than parameters related to external control revert to the factory default. After selecting this softkey, the [Top Menu] screen or the [Initial] screen of the GSM is displayed. This influences the parameters of GSM, W-CDMA and cdma2000. Starting Condition: Values in the input fields revert to those values when the Tester was booted. The softkey memory (channel, frequency and level) and the values for the Caller ID and the Authentication Key that were set through remote control commands do not revert. After selecting this softkey, the [Top Menu] screen or the [Initial] screen of the GSM is displayed. This influences the parameters of GSM, W-CDMA and cdma2000. Do nothing: Initialization of the parameters is not performed. After selecting this softkey, the [Top Menu] screen or the [Initial] screen of the GSM is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

171 Screen Reference 5 Automatic Test Overview Feature of Automatic Test Pass or Fail test results in the test flow and measurement items are automatically obtained. This function executes RF test changing frequencies on up to six channels automatically. Combining Sequence1 and Sequence2 enables measurement on up to 12 channels in one test. System handover from Sequence1 to Sequence2 can be executed when the W00 option is installed. NOTE The W-CDMA and GSM can be set to Sequence 1 or Sequence 2. To execute system handover from Sequence 1 to Sequence 2, set the Sequence 1 to W-CDMA and the Sequence 2 to GSM. NOTE This N9360A GSM User Manual describes only the GSM system. Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA2000 User Manual and N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual for information about the test functions of W-CDMA and cdma2000 systems. Setting for Automatic Test in Configuration Mode Parameters: The parameters used in Automatic Test are set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] and [Configuration: Test Condition] screens. Loss: The path loss values for the radio systems can be set on the [Configuration Test Condition (Loss)] screen to correct the RF attenuation between the mobile phone and the Tester. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page 4-18 for correction of input/output signal. Limits of measurement items: N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-33

172 5 Screen Reference Each measurement item can be measured and analyzed with the measurement limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. ATT In/Out: The path loss values for each traffic channel can be set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen to correct the RF tests results at each traffic channel in each radio system. Sequence: Up to two test sequences can be set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. RF Test in Automatic Test Measurement items of the RF test are shown in the following table. The limit for measurement items can be set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Refer to Configuration: Test Condition Screen on page Table 5-4 describes measurement items of the RF test in Automatic Test. The limit for measurement items can be set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Table 5-4 Automatic Test Measurement Item Measurement Item Peak TX Power (High) Peak TX Power (Mid) Peak TX Power (Low) Burst Timing Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS) Description Measures the peak transmission level on the PWR CNTL High condition set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measures the peak transmission level on the PWR CNTL Mid condition set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measures the peak transmission level on the PWR CNTL Low condition set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measures the burst timing of transmission signal. Measures amplitude envelope of the RF burst signal in the timeslot. Measures the RMS (Root Mean Square) phase error over the active part of the timeslots between 0 to 147 bits N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

173 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-4 Automatic Test Measurement Item (continued) Measurement Item Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error Sens/BER II Sens/FER RX Quality RX Level Description Measures the peak phase error over the active part of the timeslots between 0 to 147 bits. Measures the frequency error over the active part of the timeslots. Measures the receiving sensitivity by the measurement of the BER (Bit Error Rate) using the loopback function. Measures the receiving sensitivity by the measurement of the FER (Frame Error Rate) using the loopback function. Displays the received signal quality with the mobile phone. Displays the received signal level with the mobile phone. NOTE The value of default state was stored in the internal memory when the tester was previously turned off. For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Test SIM Insert the Test SIM provided by Agilent in the mobile phone before performing any test because the Tester is unable to perform measurements with a SIM that is provided by cell phone operator or other Test SIMs. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-35

174 5 Screen Reference Stand-by Screen When the Automatic Test is pressed on the [Initial] screen, the [Auto Test: Stand-by] simplified screen is displayed. Then, any of the [Auto Test: Stand-by] simplified screen (Figure 5-14), the [Auto Test: Stand-by] detailed screen (Figure 5-15), or the [Auto Test: Stand-by] value screen (Figure 5-16) is displayed according to the setting of the Simple, the Detail and the Value softkey. Figure 5-14 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Simplified Screen 5-36 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

175 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-15 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Detailed Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-37

176 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-16 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Value Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Start: Starts testing the mobile phone by the Automatic Test. Previous Screen: Displays the previous sequence screen. This softkey is inactive when Sequence 1 screen is displayed. Next Screen: Displays the next sequence screen. This softkey is inactive when Sequence 2 is set to Off or the Sequence 2 screen is displayed. Screen>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 3 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

177 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 Simple: Displays the result (pass or fail) for all measurements in the center of the screen collectively. Detail: Displays the result (pass or fail) for each measurement item. Value: Displays the measurement value for each measurement item. Cancel: Cancels selecting the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-39

178 5 Screen Reference Screen Fields The input fields of parameters except procedure are protected if the Panel Key is set to Lock on the [Configuration] screen. Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-5 to execute a new test. Table 5-5 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure BCCH * TCH (Talk) * TCH * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range for each Radio System of Sequence is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a traffic channel number for Talk tests. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets up to the six traffic channels number for RF tests. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Also, the following information is shown in the screen field: 3GPP-SYS and SIG-PTN 3GPP System and Signaling Pattern are currently set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] and [Configuration: Test Condition] screens respectively and are displayed on the lower-right corner of the screen. RF On indicator 5-40 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

179 Screen Reference 5 RF On indicator at the lower-left corner of the screen is displayed only when the RF signal from the Tester is output to the RF In/Out connector. System The Systems of Sequence1 and Sequence2 are displayed on the upper-left of the screen. The Sequence currently displayed is underlined. If some measurement items are set to be skipped on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen, is shown at those item cells in the measurement result field on the detailed and the value screen. Also, if some test items in the signaling step are set to be skipped on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen, is shown at the corresponding steps in the test result field. The information from the mobile phone as Table 5-6 is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-6 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. Power Class GSM Version Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. The default value is Displays the International Mobile Station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays dialer number sent from the Tester at BS Call step. This field remains blank at this state. This field remains blank at this state. This field remains blank at this state. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Stand-by] screen: Press {Start} to begin a test. The word surrounded by {} in the message field denotes the softkey. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-41

180 5 Screen Reference Measuring Screen When the Start softkey is pressed on the [Auto Test: Stand-by] screen, a [Auto Test: Measuring] screen is displayed and then a test starts. The status of sequences is shown in the upper left corner of the screen. The sequence under test execution is underlined. One of the test flow steps is highlighted to show which step is currently being tested. While the RF Test step is highlighted, each of the measurement items is highlighted sequentially to obtain a measurement result. The test result of sequences and signaling steps are shown as follows: P: Shown on blue background when the test is passed. F: Shown on red background when the test is failed. During test, any of the [Auto Test: Measuring] simple screen (Figure 5-17), the [Auto Test: Measuring] detailed screen (Figure 5-18), or the [Auto Test: Measuring] value screen (Figure 5-19) is displayed, according to the setting of the Simple, the Detail or the Value softkey. Figure 5-17 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Simplified Screen 5-42 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

181 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-18 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Detailed Screen Figure 5-19 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Value Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-43

182 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Screen>>: Displays the softkey menu 2 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. Abort: Aborts the measurement and returns to the [Stand-by] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Simple: Displays a Pass/Fail result of whole measurement in the middle of the measurement result field in zoom. Detail: Displays a Pass/Fail result at each item cell in the measurement result field. Value: Displays a measurement value at each item cell in the measurement result field. Cancel: Cancels changing the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The information from the mobile phone as Table 5-7 is displayed in the screen field Table 5-7 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. Power Class GSM Version Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Displays dialer number sent from the Tester at BS Call step. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. Displays power class information of the mobile phone. Refer to Appendix B Power Classes on page B-2. Displays GSM Version either Phase 1 or Phase 2 defined by the mobile phone. Message Field The following message is displayed on [Measuring] screens: Press the desired softkey N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

183 Screen Reference 5 Measuring Talk Screen During Talk step execution, a [Measuring] Talk screen is displayed. Any of the [Auto Test: Measuring] Talk simple screen (Figure 5-20), the [Auto Test: Measuring] Talk detailed screen (Figure 5-21), or the [Auto Test: Measuring] Talk value screen (Figure 5-22) is displayed, according to the setting of the Simple, the Detail or the Value softkey. Figure 5-20 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Simplified Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-45

184 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-21 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Detailed Screen 5-46 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

185 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-22 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Talk Value Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Pass: Press this softkey if your voice loops back from the mobile phone with good quality. Then this softkey disappears and P is shown next to Talk step. Fail: Press this softkey if your voice loops back from the mobile phone with poor quality or your voice does not loop back from the mobile phone. Then this softkey disappears and F is shown next to Talk step. Screen>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 2 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. Abort: Aborts the test and returns to the [Stand-by] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-47

186 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu 2 Simple: Displays a Pass/Fail result of whole measurement in the middle of the measurement result field in zoom. Detail: Displays a Pass/Fail result at each item cell in the measurement result field. Value: Displays a measurement value at each item cell in the measurement result field. Cancel: Cancels changing the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen fields During the test, the operator must respond to operation or Tester messages by pressing the appropriate softkeys of the Tester or by pressing the mobile phone's button. The information from the mobile phone is displayed at the upper right corner in the screen field. Refer to Table 5-7 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information on page Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field during Talk test on [Measuring] Talk screens: Press {Pass} or {Fail} for Voice Echo test. The word surrounded by {} in the message field denotes the softkey. Aborted screen When the Abort softkey is pressed, the measurement is aborted. Any of the [Auto Test: Stand-by] aborted simplified screen, the [Auto Test: Stand-by] aborted detailed screen, or the [Auto Test: Measuring] aborted value screen is displayed, depending on the previous setting of the Simple, the Detail or the Value softkey. Figure 5-23 is a screen with the Simple softkey setting N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

187 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-23 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Aborted Simplified Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-49

188 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Start: Starts testing the mobile phone by Automatic Test. Previous Screen: Changes the screen to the previous sequence one. This softkey is inactivated when the screen for the sequence 1 is displayed. Next Screen: Changes the screen to the next sequence one. This softkey is inactivated when the sequence 2 is set to Off or the screen of Sequence 2 is displayed. Screen>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 3 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves an image file of the screen into a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 Simple: Displays a Pass/Fail result of whole measurement in the middle of the measurement result field in zoom. Detail: Displays a Pass/Fail result at each item cell in the measurement result field. Value: Displays a measurement value at each item cell in the measurement result field. Cancel: Cancels changing the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The information in the screen field is displayed. Refer to Table 5-5 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Screen Input Field on page 5-40 and Table 5-7 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information on page The input field in the screen field can be changed for a new test N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

189 Screen Reference 5 Explanation Detailed measurement results up to the aborted operation can be obtained for further analysis from the Detail screen and the Value screen. Place the circular cursor at one of the Pass/Fail result or result value cells and press the CURSOR CONTROL knob to display the Graph/Value screen containing detailed measurement results. The status of the Tester is reset to stand-by. The condition of transmission from the mobile phone is not ensured; therefore, the mobile phone power-on process needs to be repeated for a new test. Sequence 2 Screen When Sequence 2 is set on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen in the Configuration mode, Sequence 2 start after completion of BS Release in Sequence 1. The state of the sequences is shown on the upper left screen. The sequence in processing (Sequence 2 now) is underlined. Test result of sequences is shown as follows: P: Shown on blue background when the test is passed. F: Shown on red background when the test is failed. When Sequence 2 starts, the [Auto Test: Measuring] screen as Figure 5-24 is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-51

190 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-24 [Automatic Test: Measuring] Next Sequence 2 Screen Softkey Menu 1 Screen>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 2 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. Abort: Aborts the test and returns to the [Stand-by] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Simple: Displays a Pass/Fail result of whole measurement in the middle of the measurement result field in zoom. Detail: Displays a Pass/Fail result at each item cell in the measurement result field. Value: Displays a measurement value at each item cell in the measurement result field N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

191 Screen Reference 5 Cancel: Cancels changing the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Summary Screen When all tests in preset sequences are completed, measurement results are displayed on the [Stand-by] summary simplified screen (Figure 5-25), the [Stand-by] summary detailed screen (Figure 5-26) or the [Stand-by] summary value screen (Figure 5-27) depending on the previous setting of the Simple, the Detail or the Value softkey. Measurement results are shown as follows: Pass or measurement value: Shown on blue background when the measurement is passed. Fail or measurement value: Shown on red background when the measurement is failed. Measurement result is shown in different ways depending on the display mode. On the summary simplified screen, an enlarged Pass is shown in the middle of the measurement result field when all measurement items are passed. An enlarged Fail is shown when even one measurement item is failed. On the summary detailed screen, a Pass or Fail measurement result is shown at each item cell in the measurement result field. On the summary value screen, a measurement value is shown at each item cell in the measurement result field. When some signaling test items and measurement items are set to be skipped on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen, each result of test items and measurement items is shown by or ---. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-53

192 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-25 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Simplified Screen 5-54 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

193 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-26 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Detailed Screen Figure 5-27 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Summary Value Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-55

194 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Start: Starts testing the mobile phone by Automatic Test. Previous Screen: Changes the screen to the previous sequence one. This softkey is inactivated when the screen of the sequence 1 is displayed. Next Screen: Changes the screen to the next sequence one. This softkey is inactivated when the sequence 2 is set to Off or the screen of Sequence 2 is displayed. Screen>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 3 containing the softkeys to select the display mode. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 Simple: Displays a Pass/Fail result of whole measurement in the middle of the measurement result field in zoom. Detail: Displays a Pass/Fail result at each item cell in the measurement result field. Value: Displays a measurement value at each item cell in the measurement result field. Cancel: Cancels changing the display mode and returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

195 Screen Reference 5 Screen Field Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-8 to execute a new test. Table 5-8 [Auto Test: Stand-by] Summary Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure BCCH * TCH (Talk) * TCH * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range for each Radio System of Sequence is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a traffic channel number for Talk tests. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets up to the six traffic channels number for RF tests. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The information from the mobile phone as Table 5-9 is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-9 [Auto Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Displays dialer number sent from the Tester at BS Call step. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-57

196 5 Screen Reference Table 5-9 [Auto Test: Measuring] Screen Mobile Phone Information (continued) Item Information Power Class GSM Version Description Displays power class information of the mobile phone. Refer to Appendix B Power Classes on page B-2. Displays GSM Version either Phase 1 or Phase 2 defined by the mobile phone. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Stand-by] screen: Press {Start} to begin a test. The word surrounded by {} in the message field denotes the softkey. Procedure to Obtain a Graph/Value Screen Display a Graph/Value screen containing detailed test results with the following procedure: Step 1 Place the circular cursor at one of Pass/Fail result cells or measurement value cells in the measurement result field by rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 2 Select the measurement result cell by pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob one time. Step 3 Either a measurement result list or a graph with a measurement result list is displayed according to each measurement item. The following section describes Graph/Value screens with measurement results and the softkey menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

197 Screen Reference 5 Graph/Value Screen Peak TX Power This function measures and analyzes peak transmission power with three different levels against the limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. The actual measured data is shown with enlarged numerals. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-28 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Peak TX Power Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Return: Returns to the previous screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-59

198 5 Screen Reference Screen Field The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-10 [Automatic Test] Peak TX Power Screen Field Screen Field High Mid Low Description Measured Peak TX Power of PWR CNTL at high range, the Hi and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Peak TX Power of PWR CNTL at middle range, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Peak TX Power of PWR CNTL at low range, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

199 Screen Reference 5 Burst Timing/ Power Ramp This function measures and analyzes the power burst timing and the amplitude envelope in the timeslots of the RF burst signal. Readout function is available for the Power Ramp measurement. In this function, that data is shown when the marker is placed at any point of the Power Ramp measured trace. The measured data for Burst Timing and Power Ramp are shown as Figure If the measured data exceeds the limits in the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-29 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-61

200 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-30 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

201 Screen Reference 5 Zoom Off/On: Selects the zooming function from Off and On. If On is selected, the rising and trailing edges of the Power Ramp waveforms are expanded to observe the details as shown in Figure Return: Returns to the previous screen. NOTE A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. Screen Field The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-11 [Automatic Test] Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Screen Field Burst Timing Power Ramp Description Measured Burst Timing, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Power Ramp, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The Limits are specified by the radio system selected (template). N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-63

202 5 Screen Reference Phase Error/ Frequency Error This function measures and analyzes the RMS and peak phase errors and frequency error over the active part of the timeslot between 0 to 147 bits. The measurement data for RMS Phase Error, Peak Phase Error, and Frequency Error are shown with enlarged numerals as Figure If the measured data exceeds the limits in the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-31 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Phase Error Screen 5-64 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

203 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) are available at any point of the measurement trace. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Screen Field The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-12 [Auto Test] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field RMS Phase Peak Marker Frequency Description Measured Phase Error (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI and the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-65

204 5 Screen Reference Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level This function measures and analyzes the received sensitivity in the BER (bit error rate) and FER (frame error rate) formats using the loop back function of the mobile phone. Also, measurement result for RX Quality and RX Level, which are measured with the mobile phone and reported as measurement reports, are shown. The measurement data of BER, FER, RX Quality and RX Level are shown as Figure Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-32 [Automatic Test: Stand-by] Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen 5-66 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

205 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Screen Field The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-13 [Auto Test] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field BER (Class Ib) BER (Class II) FER RX Quality RX Level Description Measured BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured FER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. RX Quality measured with the mobile phone, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. RX Level measured with the mobile phone, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-67

206 5 Screen Reference Manual Test (GSM Mode) Overview Feature of Manual Test All test items are executed while the mobile phone and the Tester are connected by call control protocol. Measurement in the Talk/RF test step in the test flow is executed in a real-time. The following systems can be selected directly from the Manual Test screen. Required options are in parentheses. GPRS (G00), EGPRS (G00, G03), W-CDMA (W00), HSDPA (W00, W06), cdma2000 MC-1x (C00, C01), cdma2000 1xEV-DO (C00, C01, C02) Setting for Manual Test in the Configuration Mode Loss: The path loss values for each band can be entered on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to correct the RF attenuation between the mobile phone and the Tester. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page 4-18 for correction of input/output signal. Limits of measurement items: Each measurement item can be measured and analyzed with test limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. GSM Mode To start the GSM mode test, set the GSM mode on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen to GSM N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

207 Screen Reference 5 RF Test Table 5-14 describes measurement items of RF test in Manual Test. The limit for measurement items can be set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Refer to Configuration: Test Condition Screen on page Table 5-14 Manual Test (GSM mode) Measurement Item Input Field Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error BER Class Ib BER Class II FER Fast BER RX Quality RX Level Spectrum Monitor Description Measures the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone under test. Measures the burst timing of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Displays the burst waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. The display of the waveform is available only on the Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp screens. Measures the phase error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the frequency error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the bit error rate of the Class Ib data and the Class II data in the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the data loop back mode of the test mode A. Measures the frame erasure rate of the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the data loop back mode A. Measures the bit error rate of the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the data loop back mode of the test mode C. Displays the RX quality reported from the mobile phone under test. Displays the RX level reported from the mobile phone under test. Display the spectrum waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. This measurement is available only on the spectrum measurement screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-69

208 5 Screen Reference Table 5-14 Manual Test (GSM mode) Measurement Item Input Field Output RF Spectrum Description Measures the relative ratio of the spurious power at ±400kHz offset from the carrier frequency for the reference of the carrier power. This measurement is available only on the Output RF Spectrum screen. NOTE The default state value is the last setting stored in the internal memory of the Tester before power off. For numeric value entry, The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Test SIM Insert the Test SIM provided by Agilent in the mobile phone before performing any test because the Tester is unable to perform measurements with a SIM that is provided by cell phone operator or other Test SIMs N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

209 Screen Reference 5 Stand-by Screen When the Manual Test softkey is pressed on the [Initial] screen, the [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen as Figure 5-33 is displayed. Figure 5-33 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Location Update: Executes the Location Update process for the Tester. BS Call: Executes BS Call. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement in RF test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-71

210 5 Screen Reference The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement in RF test. To stop the measurement at the Cont mode at the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing by pressing this softkey. This softkey sets only the trigger mode at the [Stand-by] screen, but not to start the measurement. Trigger: Starts measurement in the connection status. This softkey is inactivated in the stand-by status but activated in the connection status. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to OFF, the value is set below -120 dbm. System >> : Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. SMS: Displays the SMS screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to "On" or "Off". The indicator "CDT OFF" appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to "Off". ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

211 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu 4 GSM: This softkey is unavailable. GPRS: Changes the system to GPRS. The G00 Option is required. EGPRS: Changes the system to EGPRS. The G00 Option and G03 Option are required. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 Option is required. HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 Option are required. CDMA2000>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select the cdma2000 system. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Field Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-15 to execute a new test. Table 5-15 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error Sens/BER II, Sens/FER (Sens: sensitivity) Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-73

212 5 Screen Reference Table 5-15 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * TCH * Timing ADV Caller ID PWR CNTL BS Level * Con Mode Test Loop Averaging Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio system is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a value for the timing advance ranging from 0 to 63 bits in 1 bit step. Displays dialer number sent from the Tester at BS Call execution. The set value is displayed at this state. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Selects Talk or Test. Talk: Loops back voice from the mobile phone until RF test is started. Test: Transmits data (such as PN9, PN15, etc.) set in the Data field on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen in the connection status. Refer to Connection Screen for detail. Selects Test Loop, when Con Mode is set to Test. Test Loop A: BER measurement Test Loop C: Fast BER measurement Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

213 Screen Reference 5 The following measurement items are displayed in groups in the table. When a group of measurement items is selected with the CURSOR CONTROL knob, the Graph/Value screen for the group is displayed. Table 5-16 [Manual Test: Stand-by] GSM Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. Power Class GSM Version RX Quality (only Test Loop A) RX Level (only Test Loop A) ACT Tim ADV Description Displays the default value of International Mobile Subscriber Identity. The default value is This field remains blank at this state. Displays dialer number sent from the Tester at BS Call step. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. This field remains blank at this state. The RF On indicator is displayed at the screen lower left corner only when the RF signal from the Tester is present at the RF IN/OUT connector. The following information is displayed in the screen. 3GPP-SYS and SIG-PTN Are the 3GPP System and Signaling Pattern setting which are set on [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. These are displayed at the right lower corner on the Manual Test screen. PDTCH System Is the Radio System corresponding to the RFCH setting of the PDTCH. This is displayed under the RFCH cell. The PDTCH display changes automatically in accordance with the RFCH setting of DTCH. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-75

214 5 Screen Reference Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Stand-by] screen: Press {Location Update}, {BS Call} or dial and call from the mobile. The word surrounded by {} in the message field denotes the softkey. Explanation To start a test, turn the mobile phone on and wait for location update is passed automatically. P is shown on blue background at the test result cell of Location Update step when location update is passed. After that, there are two ways to continue the test process. BS Call Press the BS Call softkey. The BS Call step is highlighted. Then, the following test result is shown in the test result field of the BS Call step. P: Shown on blue background when call setup is executed properly and BS Call is passed. F: Shown on red background when BS Call is failed. MS Call Dial and press the Off Hook button on the mobile phone. The MS Call step is highlighted. When the Tester receives MS CALL signal, the screen is switched to the MS Call suspension screen. Connection step is started when Connection Wait timeout (See Table 5-83) is expired or the Answer softkey is pressed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

215 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-34 [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) The following test result is shown in the test result field of the MS Call step. P: Shown on blue background when a proper call setup is executed and MS Call is passed. F: Shown on red background when MS Call is failed. When one of above procedure is performed, the screen changes from [Stand-by] screen to [Measuring] screen and a test starts. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-77

216 5 Screen Reference Connection Screen When call connection between the mobile phone and the Tester is succeeded, a [Measuring] connection screen as Figure 5-35 or Figure 5-36 is displayed. If the trigger mode is set to Cont, continuous measurement of RF test starts as soon as a [Measuring] connection screen is displayed. Until the measurement starts, the Tester loops back voice from the mobile phone. Figure 5-35 [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Connection Screen (GSM) 5-78 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

217 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-36 [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Connection Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Release: Executes call Release from the Tester. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. Trigger: Starts single measurement. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-79

218 5 Screen Reference More (1 of 3): Displays the softkey menu 2 Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the softkey menu 1. Softkey Menu 2 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to "On" or "Off". The indicator "CDT OFF" appears at the left lower corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to "Off". More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The following input field in the screen field can be changed on the [Measuring] screens. Change the input fields according to Table Table 5-17 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field Input Field Measuring mode TCH * Timing ADV Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error Sens/BER II, Sens/FER (Sens: sensitivity) Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 If the channel number is changed in the Connection state, handover is executed. Sets a value for the timing advance ranging from 0 to 63 bits in 1 bit step N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

219 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-17 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field (continued) Input Field Caller ID PWR CNTL BS Level * Con Mode Test Loop Averaging Description Displays addresser number sent from the Tester at BS Call execution. To change the Caller ID, remote control application (provided by user) is required. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Selects Talk or Test. Talk: Loops back voice from the mobile phone until RF test is started. Test: Transmits data (such as PN9, PN15 and so forth) set in the Data field on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen in the connection status. Refer to Connection for details. Selects type of test loop, when Con Mode is set to Test. Test Loop A: BER measurement Test Loop C: Fast BER measurement Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The information from the mobile phone as Table 5-18 is displayed on the left side of the screen. Table 5-18 [Manual Test: Measuring] GSM Mode Connection Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. GSM Version Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Displays addresser number sent from the Tester at BS Call execution. To change the Caller ID, remote control application (provided by user) is required. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. During Connection state, the DTMF tone number is added to the right side of the Dialed No. When the number reaches over 20 digits, the left end number is deleted. Displays GSM Version either Phase 1 or Phase 2 defined by the mobile phone. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-81

220 5 Screen Reference Table 5-18 [Manual Test: Measuring] GSM Mode Connection Screen Mobile Phone Information (continued) Item Information Power Class ACT Tim ADV RX Quality (only Test Loop A) RX Level (only Test Loop A) Description Displays power class information of the mobile phone. Refer to Appendix B Power Classes on page B-2. Displays the number of bits for the actual timing advance data. Displays the measurement result for the received signal quality. Displays the measurement result for the received signal level. Measuring Screen Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the Connection screens: Press the desired softkey. While BS Call or MS call is connected, RF test can be executed to measure the mobile phone before the call is released. Figure 5-37 [Manual Test: Measuring] BS Call Screen (GSM) 5-82 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

221 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-38 [Manual Test: Measuring] MS Call Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement.when the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated. Message Field The following message is displayed in the screen field on [Measuring] screens: Processing N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-83

222 5 Screen Reference Result Screen When the measurement is completed, a [Measuring] summary screen showing measurement results is displayed. To end the measurement in BS Call connection, press the Release softkey to disconnect from the Tester. To end the measurement in MS Call connection, press the On Hook button on the mobile phone or the Release softkey to disconnect from the mobile phone. When disconnecting the call is completed, a [Stand-by] summary screen as Figure 5-39 or Figure 5-40 is displayed. Pass: Shown on the blue background when the measurement is passed. Fail: Shown on the red background when the measurement is failed. Figure 5-39 [Manual Test: Stand-by] BS Call Result Screen (GSM) 5-84 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

223 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-40 [Manual Test: Stand-by] MS Call Result Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Location Update: Executes the Location Update process for the Tester. BS Call: Executes BS Call. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement in RF test. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement in RF test. Trigger: Starts measurement in the connection status. This softkey is inactivated in the stand-by status but activated in the connection status. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-85

224 5 Screen Reference More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to OFF, the value is set below to -120 dbm. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. SMS: Displays the SMS screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 4 GSM: This softkey is unavailable. GPRS: Changes the system to GPRS. The G00 option is required. EGPRS: Changes the system to EGPRS. The G00 and G03 options are required. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 options are required. Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

225 Screen Reference 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Field The information in the screen field is displayed. Refer to Table 5-15 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field on page 5-73 and Table 5-18 [Manual Test: Measuring] GSM Mode Connection Screen Mobile Phone Information on page The input field in the screen field can be changed for a new test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-87

226 5 Screen Reference Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value Screen To obtain a Graph/Value from a [Stand-by] summary screen or a [Measuring] summary screen, follow the procedure described below. Step 1 Place the cursor at one of the measurement items by rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 2 Selects the measurement item by pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 3 Either a measurement result list or a graph with a measurement result list is displayed according to each measurement item. Measuring cannot be executed on the Graph/Value screen obtained from the [Stand-by] screen because the call connection between the mobile phone and the Tester is disconnected N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

227 Screen Reference 5 Graph/Value Screen Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp The measured data are shown in enlarged numerals. The Power Ramp result is shown when the marker is placed at any point on its measured trace. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-41 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen (GSM) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-89

228 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-42 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob between Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

229 Screen Reference 5 Zoom Off/On: Selects the zooming from Off and On. If On is selected, the rising edge, between -8 bits and 0 bits, and trailing edge, between 147 and 155 bits, of the Power Ramp waveforms are expanded to observe the derailed test result as shown in Figure Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is invalid on a [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-91

230 5 Screen Reference Screen field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-19 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen GSM Mode Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * TCH * Timing ADV PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio system is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a value for the timing advance ranging from 0 to 63 bits in 1 bit step. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 99 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

231 Screen Reference 5 NOTE A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-20 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Screen Field Description Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Measured Peak TX Power, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Burst Timing, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Power Ramp, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The limits are specified by the radio system selected (template). Phase Error/ Frequency Error The RMS and Peak Phase Error and Frequency Error are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. If the measured data exceeds the limits in the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-93

232 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-43 [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

233 Screen Reference 5 The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on a [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-21 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Input Field Input Field Procedure Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-95

234 5 Screen Reference Table 5-21 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Input Field (continued) Input Field Radio System BCCH * TCH * PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging Description Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-22 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field RMS Description Measured Phase Error (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

235 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-22 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field Phase Peak Marker Frequency Description Measured Phase Error (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI and the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level The measured data for BER, FER, RX Quality, and RX Level are shown as follows. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-44 [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen (GSM) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-97

236 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on a [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The input fields of the following parameters need to be set for a new test: Table 5-23 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

237 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-23 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Radio System BCCH * TCH * Test Loop PWR CNTL * BER BS Lev * BER Frames * (Test Loop A) Fast BER Frames * (Test Loop C) Description Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Selects A or C Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. Sets the number of test frames for BER and Fast BER measurement. The allowable range is from 1 to in 1 step. BER Frames: displays the number of test bits of the Class1b and Class II. Fast BER Frames: displays the number of test bits of the Fast BER Class1b: The number of test bits, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 78 bits, is displayed. Fast BER: The number of test bits, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 456 bits, is displayed. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-99

238 5 Screen Reference The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-24 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/RX Quality/RX Level Screen Field Screen Field BER (Class Ib) (Test Loop A) BER (Class II) (Test Loop A) FER (Test Loop A) Fast BER (Test Loop C) RX Quality (Test Loop A) RX Level (Test Loop A) Description Measured BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured FER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Fast BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. RX Quality measured with the mobile phone, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. RX Level measured with the mobile phone, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

239 Screen Reference 5 Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) This screen measures the power at the adjacent channel and shows the relative ratio of the spurious power due to the modulation and due to the switching at ±400kHz offset from the carrier frequency for the reference of the carrier power. Figure 5-45 [Manual Test: Measuring] Output RF Spectrum Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-101

240 5 Screen Reference To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on a [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The input fields of the following parameters need to be set for a new test: Table 5-25 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Modulation Switching Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall parameters for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

241 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-25 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/ RX Quality/ RX Level Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * PDTCH * ORFS Meas. Count PWR CNTL * BS Lev * Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Accepts a value for packet data traffic channel. The frequency corresponding to the channel accompanies. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets Measurement Burst during ORFS test, ranging from 1 to 200. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. * For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement results is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-26 [Manual Test] GSM Mode ORFS Screen Field Screen Field Modulation Description Displays measured Modulation value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and -400 khz (Lower). Switching Displays measured Switching transient value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and -400 khz (Lower). N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-103

242 5 Screen Reference Table 5-26 [Manual Test] GSM Mode ORFS Screen Field (continued) Screen Field Modulation Type Ref. Power Description The Modulation Type is shown. The power at the time of measurement is shown. Spectrum Monitor The RF spectrum of the traffic channel can be measured by Spectrum Monitor. The spectrum, which is measured from f c to f c khz relative to the traffic channel frequency, is shown with readouts at +200kHz (M1) and +250kHz (M2) offsets. Figure 5-46 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GSM) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

243 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the frequency and amplitude is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on a [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous summary screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-105

244 5 Screen Reference Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-27 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * TCH * Averaging PWR CNTL BS Level * RBW Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the averaging number from 2 to 99 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Selects 10 khz or 30 khz resolution bandwidth as follows: 10: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 10kHz. 30: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 30kHz. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

245 Screen Reference 5 The measurement results as Table 5-28 is displayed: Table 5-28 [Manual Test] GSM Mode Sensitivity/RX Quality/RX Level Screen Field Screen Field Peak Marker * M1: +200kHz M2: +250kHz Description The absolute peak power and frequency are shown. The readout of frequency and amplitude at the marker position is shown as follows when the marker is activated by the Knob Cur/Marker softkey setting: MHz dbm: The absolute frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. ( khz db): The relative frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. The amplitudes at +200 khz and +250 khz offsets relative to the traffic channel frequency are also shown. * The resolution of the marker on the screen is not equivalent to the measurement resolution. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field: Press the desired softkey. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-107

246 5 Screen Reference SMS Screen After the Location Update step is passed in the GSM mode, press the More (1 of 2) and SMS softkeys in the softkey menu 2 on the [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen to display the [Manual Test: Stand-by] SMS Screen as Figure 5-47 for testing SMS function. Figure 5-47 [Manual Test: Stand-by] SMS Screen (GSM) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 SMSCB: Transmits a short message by the cell broadcast. The maximum number of sendable characters is 93 (ASCII). SMSMT: Transmits a short message from the Tester. The maximum number of characters is 160 (ASCII). More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Stand-by] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

247 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves an image file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-29 to execute a new test. Table 5-29 [Manual Test] GSM Mode SMS Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * TCH * Timing ADV * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a value for the timing advance ranging from 0 to 63 bits in 1 bit step. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-109

248 5 Screen Reference Table 5-29 [Manual Test] GSM Mode SMS Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field PWR CNTL BS Level * Caller ID Description Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Displays addresser number sent from the Tester at BS Call execution. The set value is displayed at this state. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The data and the message from/to the mobile phone are shown in this field. Table 5-30 [Manual Test] GSM Mode SMS Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Caller ID Dialed No. GSM Version Power Class ACT Tim ADV Receive Message Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Displays addresser number sent from the Tester at BS Call execution. Displays the number dialed from the mobile phone. Displays either Phase 1 or Phase 2 defined by the mobile phone. Displays power class information of the mobile phone. Refer to Power Classes on page B-2. Displays the number of bits for the actual timing advance data. Displays the message received from the mobile phone. The number of received characters is up to 160 characters (ASCII). Send Message Displays the message sent to the mobile phone. The number of sendable characters is up to 160 characters (ASCII). NOTE Remote Control application (provided by user) is required to change the Send Message N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

249 Screen Reference 5 Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field: Press {SMSCB}, {SMSMT}, or dial and call from the mobile. The word surrounded by {} in the message field demotes the softkey. Manual Test (GPRS Mode) Overview Explanation SMSMO: Send a message from the mobile phone, and then the message is displayed in the Receive Message field on the screen. SMSCB: Press the SMSCB softkey to send the message in the Send Message field on the screen from the Tester to the mobile phone using call broadcast function. SMSMT: Press the SMSMT softkey to send the message in the Send Message field on the screen from the Tester to the mobile phone. Description of GPRS System The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a GSM data service which is capable to provide mobile phone users with higher data transfer rates over the public switched telephone network (PSTN). The system can transfer data in packet over the air interface, and uses existing TCP/IP protocols to mate with the Internet and other data networks. Feature of Manual Test GPRS Mode Each test item can be executed manually. All test items are executed while the mobile phone and the Tester are connected by call control protocol. Measurement of RF test step in test flow is executed in real time. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-111

250 5 Screen Reference The following systems can be selected directly from the Manual Test screen. Required options are in parentheses. GSM (G00), EGPRS (G00, G03), W-CDMA (W00), HSDPA (W00, W06), cdma2000 MC-1x (C00, C01), cdma2000 1xEV-DO (C00, C01, C02) Setting for Manual Test GPRS Mode in the Configuration Mode Loss: The path loss values for each band can be entered on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen to correct the RF attenuation between the mobile phone and the Tester. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page 4-18 for correction of input/output signal. Limits of measurement items: Each measurement item can be measured and analyzed with the measurement limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot The combination of the slot configuration and the order of measurement slot are follows: Table 5-31 Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot Slot Configuration Measurement Slot , or or GSM mode To start the GPRS mode test, set the GSM mode to GPRS on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen to GPRS N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

251 Screen Reference 5 RF Test Table 5-32 describes measurement items of the RF test in Manual Test. The limit for measurement items can be set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Refer to Configuration: Test Sequence Screen on page Table 5-32 Manual Test GPRS Mode Measurement Item Input Field Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error BLER BER Spectrum Monitor Output RF Spectrum Description Measures the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone under test. Measures the burst timing of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Displays the burst waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. The display of the waveform is available only on the Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp screens. Measures the phase error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the frequency error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the block error rate (the ratio of data blocks received in error to the total number of received data blocks at the mobile phone under test). Measures the bit error rate of the Class Ib data and the Class II data in the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the data loop back mode of the test mode A. Display the spectrum waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. This measurement is available only on the spectrum measurement screen. Measures the relative ratio of the spurious power at ±400kHz offset from the carrier frequency for the reference of the carrier power. This measurement is available only on the Output RF Spectrum screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-113

252 5 Screen Reference NOTE The value of default state was stored in the internal memory when the tester was previously turned off. For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Test SIM Insert the Test SIM provided by Agilent in the mobile phone before performing any test because the Tester is unable to perform measurements with a SIM that is provided by cell phone operator or other Test SIMs. Stand-by Screen When the GPRS is selected in the GSM mode from the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen, the following [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen is displayed. Slot Config and Measurement Slot fields are additionally available for GPRS measurements N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

253 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-48 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement in RF test. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement in RF test. Trigger: Starts single measurement in the attached status. This softkey is invalid in the Stand-by status but activated in the attached status. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-115

254 5 Screen Reference Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 4 GSM: Changes the system to GSM. The G00 option is required. GPRS: This softkey is unavailable. EGPRS: Changes the system to EGPRS. The G00 and G03 option are required. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 options are required. CDMA2000>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 5 to select the cdma2000 system. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

255 Screen Reference 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Fields Set the input fields on the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-33 to execute a new test. Table 5-33 [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * Coding Scheme Averaging Description Sets whether or not to execute test items or each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error BLER (Test Mode: ACK), BER (Test Mode: B) Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the Coding Scheme of PDTCH data (up and down). Selects from CS1 to CS4. Attach: Up/Down CS1: fixed Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-117

256 5 Screen Reference Table 5-33 [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field Input Field PWR CNTL BS Level * Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Slot Config Selects 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, or 4 1 Measur Slot Description When the Slot Config is set to 2 2 or 3 2, this field becomes a settable field. Selects measurement slot from 2 to 4 depending on the setting of the Slot Config. Test Mode Selects from ACK, A, or B. ACK: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and BLER A: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error B: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error and BER. Active in Unacknowledged Mode for UL/DL. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The following measurement items are displayed in groups in the table. When a group of measurement items is selected with the CURSOR CONTROL knob, the Graph/Value screen for each group is displayed. Table 5-34 [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information Description IMSI Displays the default value of International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. IMEI This field remains blank at this state. Multislot Class Displays the GPRS Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. RF Power Capability Displays RF Power class of each Radio System, ranging from 1 to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

257 Screen Reference 5 The RF On indicator is displayed at the lower left side corner of the screen only when the RF signal from the Tester is present at the RF IN/OUT connector. The following information is displayed in the screen. 3GPP-SYS and SIG-PTN Are the 3GPP System and Signaling Pattern setting which are set on [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. These are displayed at the right lower corner on the Manual Test screen. PDTCH System Is the Radio System corresponding to the RFCH setting of the PDTCH. This is displayed under the RFCH cell. The PDTCH display changes automatically in accordance with the RFCH setting of DTCH. Message Field The following message is displayed on the [Stand-by] screen: Press the desired softkey. Explanation To start a test, turn the mobile phone on and wait for the Attach step is passed. After that, the [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached screen is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-119

258 5 Screen Reference Attached Screen After completion of the attaching process, the [Measuring] screen as Figure 5-49 is displayed. The Attached step in the test flow field is highlighted and P is shown at the test result cell for the Attach step. Figure 5-49 [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 End: Starts the detach process. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to OFF, the value is set below -120 dbm. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

259 Screen Reference 5 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field The following input field can be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Change the input fields according to Table N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-121

260 5 Screen Reference Table 5-35 [Manual Test: Measuring] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode PDTCH * Coding Scheme Averaging PWR CNTL * BS Level * Description Sets whether or not to execute test items or each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error BLER (TestMode: ACK) BER (Test Mode: B) Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the Coding Scheme of PDTCH data (up and down). Selects from CS1 to CS4. Attach: Up/Down CS1: fixed Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Slot Config Selects 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, or 4 1 Measur Slot When the Slot Config is set to 2 2 or 3 2, this field becomes a settable field. Selects measurement slot from 2 to 4 depending on the setting of the Slot Config. Test Mode Selects from ACK, A, or B. ACK: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and BLER A: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error B: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error and BER. Active in Unacknowledged Mode for UL/DL. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

261 Screen Reference 5 The information from the mobile phone is displayed on the left side of the screen. Table 5-36 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information Description IMSI Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. IMEI Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Multislot Class Displays the Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. RF Power Capability Displays the power class for each Radio System, ranging from 1 to 5. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Measuring] screen: Press the desired softkey. Explanation The Connect process starts and measurement is executed with the following ways: Press the Trigger softkey to execute single measurement. Press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont in order to execute continuous measurement. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-123

262 5 Screen Reference Connected Screen When measurement starts, the [Measuring] connected screen as Figure 5-50 is displayed. Figure 5-50 [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, the continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

263 Screen Reference 5 Result Screen After completion of the measurement in the Connected step, the disconnect process starts, and then a [Measuring] summary screen showing measurement results is automatically displayed. To end the measurement in the attached status, press the End softkey to start the detach process. Although [Measuring] results are displayed without detach process, the screen has some limits of parameter change. When the detach process is completed, a [Stand-by] summary screen as Figure 5-51 is displayed. A measurement result and Pass/Fail result are shown right next to each measurement item. Pass: Shown on blue background when the measurement is passed. Fail: Shown on red background when the measurement is failed. Figure 5-51 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (GPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-125

264 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to OFF, the value is set below to -120 dbm. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement in RF test. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement in RF test. Trigger: Starts measurement in the attached status. This softkey is invalid in the Stand-by status but activated in the attached status. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF Spectrum] screen. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the softkey menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

265 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu 4 GSM: Changes the system to GSM. The G00 option is required. GPRS: This softkey is unavailable. EGPRS: Changes the system to EGPRS. The G00 and G03 option are required. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 options are required. CDMA2000>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 5 to select the cdma2000 system. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Field The information in the screen field is displayed. Refer to Table 5-33 [Manual Test: Stand-by] GPRS Mode Screen Input Field on page and Table 5-36 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Informationon page The input field in the screen field can be changed for a new test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-127

266 5 Screen Reference Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen To obtain a Graph/Value from the [Stand-by] summary screen or the [Measuring] summary screen, follow the procedure described below. Step 1 Place the cursor at one of the test items by rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 2 Select the test item by pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 3 Either a measurement result list or a graph with a measurement result list is displayed according to each measurement item. Measuring cannot be executed on the Graph/Value screen obtained from the [Stand-by] screen because the call connection between the mobile phone and the Tester is disconnected N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

267 Screen Reference 5 Graph/Value Screen Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp The measured data are shown in enlarged numerals. The Power Ramp result is shown when the marker is placed at any point on its measured trace. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-52 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen (GPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-129

268 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-53 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

269 Screen Reference 5 Zoom Off/On: Toggles the zooming function between Off and On. If On is selected, the rising edge, between -8 bits and 0 bits, and trailing edge, between 147 and 155 bits, of the Power Ramp waveforms are expanded to observe the derailed test result as shown in Figure Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-131

270 5 Screen Reference Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-37 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

271 Screen Reference 5 NOTE A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-38 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Measurement Item Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Description Measured Peak TX Power, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Burst Timing, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Measured Power Ramp, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The limits are specified by the radio system selected (template). Phase Error/Frequency Error The RMS and Peak Phase Error and Frequency Error are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-133

272 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-54 [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

273 Screen Reference 5 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-39 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-135

274 5 Screen Reference Table 5-39 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging * Description Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

275 Screen Reference 5 The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-40 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field Phase RMS Phase Peak Marker Freq. Err Description Measured Phase Error (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI and the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-137

276 5 Screen Reference Sensitivity/BLER/BER The measured data for BLER (block error rate) or BER (bit error rate) is shown as Figure Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-55 [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity in BLER Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

277 Screen Reference 5 The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. Mode (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-41 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-139

278 5 Screen Reference Table 5-41 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field PDTCH * Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Test Mode Selects from ACK, A, or B. PWR CNTL Sens BS Lv * BLER Frames * (Test Mode: ACK) BER Frames * (Test Mode: B) Description Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester for the Sensitivity test. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets the number of test frames for BLER and BER measurement. The allowable range is from 1 to BER Frames: displays the number of test bits. Coding Scheme: The number of test bits for CS1, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 160 bits, is displayed. Coding Scheme: The number of test bits for CS2, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 240 bits, is displayed. Coding Scheme: The number of test bits for CS3, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 288 bits, is displayed. Coding Scheme: The number of test bits for CS4, derived from an equation BER Frames multiplied by 400 bits, is displayed. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement result is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-42 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Field Screen Field BLER (Test Mode: ACK) BER (Test Mode: B) Description Measured BLER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured BER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

279 Screen Reference 5 Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) This screen measures the power at the adjacent channel and shows the relative ratio of the spurious power due to the modulation and due to the switching at ±400kHz offset from the carrier frequency for the reference of the carrier power. Figure 5-56 [Manual Test: Measuring] Output RF Spectrum Screen (GPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-141

280 5 Screen Reference To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To stop the measurement at the Cont mode at the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing by pressing this softkey. This softkey sets only the trigger mode at the [Stand-by] screen, but not to start the measurement.. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated in the stand-by status but activated in the connection status. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new spectrum test. Table 5-43 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Modulation Switching Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall parameters for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

281 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-43 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * PDTCH * ORFS Meas. Count PWR CNTL * BS Level * Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets Measurement Burst during ORFS test, ranging from 1 to 200. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement results is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-44 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Screen Field Modulation Description Displays measured Modulation value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and -400 khz (Lower). Switching Displays measured Switching transient value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and -400 khz (Lower). Modulation Type The Modulation Type is shown. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-143

282 5 Screen Reference Table 5-44 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field (continued) Screen Field Ref. Power Description The power at the time of measurement is shown. Spectrum Monitor The RF spectrum of the packet data traffic channel can be measured by Spectrum Monitor. The spectrum, which is measured from f c to f c khz relative to the packet data traffic channel frequency, is shown with readouts at +200 khz (M1) and +250 khz (M2) offsets. Figure 5-57 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (GPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

283 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the frequency and amplitude is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand]-by screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Fields N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-145

284 5 Screen Reference Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new spectrum test. Table 5-45 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * Averaging * PWR CNTL BS Level * RBW Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Selects 10 khz or 30 khz resolution bandwidth as follows: 10: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 10 khz. 30: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 30 khz. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

285 Screen Reference 5 The measurement results are shown in the screen field: Table 5-46 [Manual Test] GPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Field Screen Field Peak Marker * M1: +200kHz M2: +250kHz Description The absolute peak power and frequency are shown. The readout of frequency and amplitude at the marker position is shown as follows when the marker is activated by the Knob Cur/Marker softkey setting: MHz dbm: The absolute frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. ( khz db): The relative frequency and amplitude the marker position are shown. The amplitude at +200 khz and +250 khz offsets relative to the packet data traffic channel frequency are also shown. * The resolution of the marker on the screen is not equivalent to the measurement resolution. Manual Test (EGPRS Mode) NOTE Install the Option G03 before using EGPRS Test function. Overview Description of EGPRS System The Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS), or enhanced GPRS, employs a new modulation scheme called EDGE (Enhanced Data GSM Environment). The scheme employs eight phase-shift keying (8-PSK), and achieves high-speed data transmission of maximum 236.8kbps. Feature of Manual Test GPRS Mode Each test item can be executed manually. All test items are executed while the mobile phone and the Tester are connected by call control protocol. Measurement of RF test step in the test flow is executed in real time. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-147

286 5 Screen Reference The following systems can be selected directly from the Manual Test screen. Required options are in parentheses. GSM (G00), GPRS (G00), W-CDMA (W00), HSDPA (W00, W06), cdma2000 MC-1x (C00, C01), cdma2000 1xEV-DO (C00, C01, C02) Setting for Manual Test EGPRS Mode in the Configuration Mode Loss: The path loss values for each band can be entered on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen to correct the RF attenuation between the mobile phone and the Tester. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page 4-18 for correction of input/output signal. Limits of measurement items: Each measurement item can be measured and analyzed with the measurement limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot The combination of the slot configuration and the order of measurement slot are follows: Table 5-47 Slot Configuration and Measurement Slot Slot Configuration Measurement Slot , or or 4 NOTE For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The default state is the last setting stored in the internal memory of the Tester before power off N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

287 Screen Reference 5 RF Test in Manual Test Table 5-48 describes measurement items of RF test in Manual Test. The limit for measurement items can be set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Refer to Configuration: Test Sequence Screen on page Table 5-48 Manual Test EGPRS Mode Measurement Item Input Field Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error EVM (RMS) EVM (peak) EVM (95%) Origin Offset Spr. BLER BER SRB Loopback BER Description Measures the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone under test. Measures the burst timing of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Displays the burst waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. The display of the waveform is available only on the Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp screens. Measures the phase error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. This field is displayed when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS1 to MCS4 or Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9 and the Test Mode is set to ACK. Measures the frequency error of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the EVM of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. This field is displayed when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9 and the Test Mode is set to ACK or SRB. Measures the origin offset of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. Measures the block error rate (the ratio of data blocks received in error to the total number of received data blocks at the mobile phone under test). Measures the bit error rate of the Class Ib data and the Class II data in the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the data loop back mode of the test mode A. Measures the bit error rate of the data returned from the mobile phone under test at the SRB data loop back mode. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-149

288 5 Screen Reference Table 5-48 Manual Test EGPRS Mode Measurement Item Input Field Spectrum Monitor Description Display the spectrum waveform of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test. This measurement is available only on the spectrum measurement screen. Output RF Spectrum Measures the relative ratio of the spurious power at ±400kHz offset from the carrier frequency for the reference of the carrier power. This measurement is available only on the Output RF Spectrum screen. NOTE The default state value is the last setting stored in the internal memory of the Tester before power off. For numeric value entry, The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Test SIM Insert the Test SIM provided by Agilent in the mobile phone before performing any test because the Tester is unable to perform measurements with a SIM that is provided by cell phone operator or other Test SIMs N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

289 Screen Reference 5 Stand-by Screen When the EGPRS is selected in the GSM mode from the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen, the following [Manual Test: Stand-by] screen is displayed. Figure 5-58 [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to Off, the value is set below -120 dbm. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-151

290 5 Screen Reference Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement in RF test. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement in RF test. Trigger: Starts single measurement in the attached status. This softkey is invalid in the Stand-by status but activated in the attached status. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF spectrum] screen when Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 4 GSM: Changes the system to GSM. The G00 option is required. GPRS: Changes the system to GPRS. The G00 option is required. EGPRS: This softkey is unavailable. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

291 Screen Reference 5 HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 options are required. CDMA2000>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 5 to select the cdma2000 system. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Fields Set the input fields on the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-49 to execute a new test. Table 5-49 [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System Description Sets whether or not to execute test items or each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error (When the Coding Scheme is set to MCS1 to MCS4 or Coding Scheme is se to MCS5 to MCS9 and the Test Mode is set to ACK.) EVM(RMS), EVM(Peak), EVM(95%), Frequency Error, Origin Offset Spr. (When the Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9 and the Test Mode is set to ACK or SRB.) BLER (Test Mode: ACK) SRB Loopback BER: Test Mode:SRB? Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-153

292 5 Screen Reference Table 5-49 [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * PDTCH * Coding Scheme Puncturing Scheme Inc Redund Averaging PWR CNTL * BS Level * Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the Coding Scheme of PDTCH data (up and down). Selects from MCS1 to MCS9. Attach: Up/Down MCS1: fixed Sets the Puncturing Scheme of PDTCH data (down). Selects from P1 to P3. P3 is valid only when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS3, MCS4, MCS7, MCS8 and MCS9. Sets On or Off of the Incremental Redundancy of re-forwarding PDTCH during Test Mode: Ack test. Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39 dbm to +5 dbm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36 dbm to 0 dbm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33 dbm to 0 dbm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Slot Config Selects 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, or 4 1 Active in unacknowledged mode for UL/DL. SRB: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, EVM, and BER. Active in unacknowledged mode for UL/DL. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The information from the mobile phone is displayed on the left side of the screen: N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

293 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-50 [Manual Test: Stand-by] EGPRS Mode Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Multislot Class Multislot Class EGPRS RF Power Capability Description Displays the default value of International Mobile Subscriber Identity. The default value is This field remains blank at this state. Displays the GPRS Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the EGPRS Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. This field remains blank at this state. Displays the Power Class of each Radio System, ranging from 1 to 5. This field remains blank at this state. The RF On indicator is displayed at the lower left side corner of the screen only when the RF signal from the Tester is present at the RF IN/OUT connector. The following information is displayed in the screen. 3GPP-SYS and SIG-PTN Are the 3GPP System and Signaling Pattern setting which are set on [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. These are displayed at the right lower corner on the Manual Test screen. PDTCH System Is the Radio System corresponding to the RFCH setting of the DTCH. This is displayed under the RFCH cell. The PDTCH display changes automatically in accordance with the RFCH setting of DTCH. Message Field The following message is displayed on the [Stand-by] screen: Press the desired softkey. Explanation To start a test, turn the mobile phone on and wait for the Attach step is passed. After that, the [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached screen is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-155

294 5 Screen Reference Attached Screen After completion of the attaching process, the [Measuring] screen as Figure 5-59 is displayed. The Attached step in the test flow field is highlighted and P is shown at the test result cell for the Attach step. Figure 5-59 [Manual Test: Measuring] Attached Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 End: Starts the detach process. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to Off, the value is set below -120 dbm. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

295 Screen Reference 5 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement. The Cont mode provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF spectrum] screen when Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-157

296 5 Screen Reference Screen Field The following input field can be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Change the input fields according to Table Table 5-51 [Manual Test: Measuring] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode PDTCH * Coding Scheme Puncturing Scheme Inc Redund Averaging PWR CNTL * BS Level * Description Sets whether or not to execute test items or each group of test items. Select On or Off. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error EVM (RMS), EVM(Peak), EVM(95%), Frequency Error, Origin Offset Spr. BLER (Test Mode: ACK) SRB Loopback BER (Test Mode: SRB) Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the Coding Scheme of PDTCH data (up and down). Selects from MCS1 to MCS9. Attach: Up/Down MCS1: fixed Sets the Puncturing Scheme of PDTCH data (down). Selects from P1 to P3. P3 is valid only when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS3, MCS4, MCS7, MCS8 and MCS9. Sets On or Off of the Incremental Redundancy of re-forwarding PDTCH during Test Mode: ACK test. Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Slot Config Selects 1 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 2, or 4 1 Meas Slot When the Slot Config is set to 2 2 or 3 2, this field becomes a settable field. Selects measurement slot from 2 to 4 depending on the setting of the Slot Config N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

297 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-51 [Manual Test: Measuring] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Test Mode Description ACK: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and BLER A: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error B: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error and BER. Active in Unacknowledged Mode for UL/DL. SRB: Measurement of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and EVM. Active in unacknowledged mode for UL/DL. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The information from the mobile phone is displayed on the left side of the screen. Table 5-52 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Information Item Information IMSI IMEI Description Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity from the mobile phone. Displays the International Mobile station Equipment Identity from the mobile phone. Multislot Class Displays the Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. Multislot Class EGPRS Displays the EGPRS Multislot Class of the Mobile phone, ranging from 1 to 12. RF Power Capability Displays the power class for each Radio System, ranging from 1 to 5. Displays the GMSK power class when "Coding Scheme" is set from MCS1 to MCS4. Displays the 8PSK power class when "Coding Scheme is set from MCS5 to MCS9. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Measuring] screen: Press the desired softkey. Explanation The Connect process starts and measurement is executed with the following ways: Press the Trigger softkey to execute single measurement. Press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey to change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont in order to execute continuous measurement. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-159

298 5 Screen Reference Connected Screen When measurement starts, the [Measuring] connected screen as Figure 5-60 is displayed. Figure 5-60 [Manual Test: Measuring] Connected Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, the continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

299 Screen Reference 5 Result Screen After completion of the measurement in the Connected step, the disconnect process starts, and then a [Measuring] summary screen showing measurement results is automatically displayed. To end the measurement in the attached status, press the End softkey to start the detach process. Although [Measuring] results are displayed without detach process, the screen has some limits of parameter change. When the detach process is completed, a [Stand-by] summary screen as Figure 5-61 is displayed. A measurement result and Pass/Fail result are shown right next to each measurement item. Pass: Shown on blue background when the measurement is passed. Fail: Shown on red background when the measurement is failed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-161

300 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-61 [Manual Test: Stand-by] Result Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. When it is set to On, it is set to the value of BS Level. When it is set to OFF, the value is set below to -120 dbm. Clear Status: Clears Pass/Fail results at signaling steps in the test flow. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode provides single measurement in RF test N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

301 Screen Reference 5 The Cont mode provides continuous measurement in RF test. Trigger: Starts measurement in the attached status. This softkey is invalid in the Stand-by status but activated in the attached status. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF spectrum] screen when Coding Scheme is set to MCS5 to MCS9. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 4 to select system. Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 3 Debug Data > USB: Stores the debug data into the USB memory device. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (3 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 4 GSM: Changes the system to GSM. The G00 option is required. GPRS: Changes the system to GPRS. The G00 option is required. EGPRS: This softkey is unavailable. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. HSDPA: Changes the system to HSDPA. The W00 and W06 options are required. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-163

302 5 Screen Reference CDMA2000>>: Displays the Softkey Menu 5 to select the cdma2000 system. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Softkey Menu 5 MC-1x: Changes the system to the MC-1x mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00 and C01 options are required. 1xEV-DO: Changes the system to the 1xEV-DO mode on the CDMA Mode. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting the cdma2000 system and returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Screen Field The input fields and information from the mobile phone are displayed in the screen field. Refer to Table 5-51, [Manual Test: Measuring] EGPRS Mode Screen Input Field, on and Table 5-52, [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Attached Screen Mobile Phone Information, on The input field in the screen field can be changed for a new test N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

303 Screen Reference 5 Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen To obtain a Graph/Value from the [Stand-by] summary screen or the [Measuring] summary screen, follow the procedure described below. Step 1 Place the cursor at one of the test items by rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 2 Select the test item by pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 3 Either a measurement result list or a graph with a measurement result list is displayed according to each measurement item. Measuring cannot be executed on the Graph/Value screen obtained from the [Stand-by] screen because the call connection between the mobile phone and the Tester is disconnected. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-165

304 5 Screen Reference Graph/Value Screen Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp The measured data are shown in enlarged numerals. The Power Ramp result is shown when the marker is placed at any point on its measured trace. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-62 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen (EGPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

305 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-63 [Manual Test: Measuring] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-167

306 5 Screen Reference Zoom Off/On: Toggles the zooming function between Off and On. At the On setting, the zoomed waveform of rising edge and the falling edge are displayed as shown in Figure At the setting of one of Coding Scheme:MCS1 to 4 or Test Mode:ACK, the rising edge of the power ramp waveform (-8 to 0bit), and falling edge (147 to 155bit) are displayed. At the setting of one of Coding Scheme:MCS5 to 9 except Test Mode:ACK: the rising edge of the power ramp waveform (-24 to 6 bit), and falling edge (435 to 465 bit) are displayed. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

307 Screen Reference 5 Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-53 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-169

308 5 Screen Reference NOTE A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. The measurement results are shown in the screen field. Table 5-54 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Measurement Item Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Description Measured Peak TX Power, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Burst Timing, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Power Ramp, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The limits are specified by the radio system selected (template). Phase Error/ Frequency Error The RMS and Peak Phase Error and Frequency Error are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

309 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-64 [Manual Test: Measuring] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-171

310 5 Screen Reference The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-55 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

311 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-55 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * PDTCH * PWR CNTL BS Level * Averaging * Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-173

312 5 Screen Reference The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-56 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field Phase RMS Phase Peak Marker Freq. Err Description Measured Phase Error (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI and the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. NOTE Phase Error/Frequency Error function is valid when the Coding Scheme is set to MCS1 to MCS4 or Test Mode:ACK on the [Standby] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

313 Screen Reference 5 EVM NOTE Install the Option G03 to display EVM screen (EGPRS mode). Set the Coding Scheme to MCS5 to MCS9 on the [Standby] Screen. The RMS, Peak, 95 %, Frequency Error, and Origin Offset are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-65 [Manual Test: Measuring] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen (EGPRS) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-175

314 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

315 Screen Reference 5 Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-57 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode EVM Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * EVM Meas. Count PWR CNTL BS Level * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets Measurement Burst during EVM test, ranging from 1 to 200. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester, ranging from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-177

316 5 Screen Reference The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-58 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode EVM Screen Field Screen Field EVM RMS EVM Peak EVM 95% Marker Freq. Err OOS Description Measured EVM (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured EVM (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI and the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured EVM (95%) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Origin Offset Suppress, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Measuring] screen: Press the desired softkey N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

317 Screen Reference 5 Sensitivity in BLER The BLER measurement is available at the ACK loopback mode, and the BER measurement is available at the SRB loopback mode The measured data for BLER (block error rate) and BER(bit error rate) is shown as Figure Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-66 [Manual Test: Measuring] Sensitivity in BLER Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-179

318 5 Screen Reference To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-59 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

319 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-59 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field PDTCH * Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Test Mode Selects from ACK, A, or B. (Only ACK mode is available for measuring.) PWR CNTL Sens BS Lv * BLER Frames * (Test Mode: ACK) SRB Frames * (Test Mode: SRB) Description Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester for the Sensitivity test. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets the number of test frames for BLER and BER measurement. The allowable range is from 1 to When testing SRB frames, the number of test bits are shown. The number of the test bits is calculated by the following formula: SRB frames X 372 bits at the coding scheme setting of MCS 1 to 4 SRB frames X 1248 bits at the coding scheme setting of MCS 5 and 6. SRB frames X 1224 bits at the coding scheme setting of MCS 7 to 9. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement result is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-60 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Sensitivity Screen Field Screen Field BLER (Test Mode: ACK) SRB Loopback BER (TestMode:SRB) Description Measured BLER and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Displays the measured value of the SRB Loopback BER, upper test limit. The upper test limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-181

320 5 Screen Reference Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) The power of the adjacent channels can be measured. The screen of the Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) shows the measurement result of the Modulation and Switching at the carrier frequency rate of 400 khz and +400 khz. Figure 5-67 [Manual Test: Output RF Spectrum] Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

321 Screen Reference 5 To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-61 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Modulation Switching Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on a [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-183

322 5 Screen Reference Table 5-61 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BCCH * PDTCH * ORFS.Meas. Count PWR CNTL * BS Level * Description Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets Measurement Burst during ORFS test, ranging from 1 to 200. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement result is displayed in the screen field. Table 5-62 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Screen Field Modulation Description Displays measured Modulation value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and 400 khz (Lower). Switching Displays measured Switching transient value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and 400 khz (Lower). Modulation Type Ref. Power The Modulation Type is shown. The power at the time of measurement is shown N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

323 Screen Reference 5 Spectrum Monitor The RF spectrum of the packet data traffic channel can be measured by Spectrum Monitor. The spectrum, which is measured from f c to f c khz relative to the packet data traffic channel frequency, is shown with readouts at +200 khz (M1) and +250 khz (M2) offsets. Figure 5-68 [Manual Test: Measuring] Spectrum Monitor Screen (EGPRS) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-185

324 5 Screen Reference Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the frequency and amplitude is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand]-by screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Call Drop Timer On/Off: Sets Call Drop Timer to On or Off. The indicator CDT OFF appears at the left lower side corner of the screen only when the call drop timer set to Off. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

325 Screen Reference 5 Screen Fields Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new spectrum test. Table 5-63 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System BCCH * PDTCH * Averaging * PWR CNTL BS Level * RBW Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets a packet data traffic channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db step. The default value is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Selects 10 khz or 30 khz resolution bandwidth as follows: 10: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 10 khz. 30: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 30 khz. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-187

326 5 Screen Reference The measurement results are shown in the screen field: Table 5-64 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode Spectrum Monitor Screen Field Screen Field Peak Marker * M1: +200kHz M2: +250kHz Description The absolute peak power and frequency are shown. The readout of frequency and amplitude at the marker position is shown as follows when the marker is activated by the Knob Cur/Marker softkey setting: MHz dbm: The absolute frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. ( khz db): The relative frequency and amplitude the marker position are shown. The amplitude at +200 khz and +250 khz offsets relative to the packet data traffic channel frequency are also shown. * The resolution of the marker on the screen is not equivalent to the measurement resolution N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

327 Screen Reference 5 TX Analyzer Overview Feature of TX Analyzer All test items are measured without signaling process. This mode is used to test the RF transmission characteristics of mobile phones in a real-time. Setting for TX Analyzer in the Configuration Mode Limits of measurement item: Each measurement item can be measured and analyzed with the measurement limits set on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Loss: The path loss value for each radio system can be set on the [Configuration] screen to correct the RF attenuation between the mobile phone and the Tester. Setting for TX Analyzer in the Signal Generator Mode The setting of RF ON/OFF and Amplitude works with those on the [Signal Generator] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-189

328 5 Screen Reference RF Test in TX Analyzer Table 5-65 describes the measurement items of RF test in the TX Analyzer test. Table 5-65 TX Analyzer Measurement Item Measurement Item Peak TX Power Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error EVM (RMS) EVM (Peak) EVM (95%) Frequency Error Origin Offset Spr. (ORFS) Description Measurement results of Peak TX Power, Burst Timing and Power Ramp are shown. When this field is selected, the Graph/Value screen for Peak TX Power/Power Ramp is displayed with measurement results on text and graph display. Measurement results of Phase Error and Frequency Error are shown. When this field is selected, the Graph/Value screen for Phase Error/Frequency Error is displayed with measurement results on text and graph display. Measurement result of EVM, Phase Error, and Origin Offset Spr. are shown. When this field is selected, the Graph/Value screen for EVM/Frequency Error/OOS is displayed with measurement results on text and graph display. NOTE For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The default state is the last setting stored in the internal memory before power off. To execute EVM and ORFS measurements, installation of Option G03 is required N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

329 Screen Reference 5 Stand-by Screen When the TX Analyzer softkey is pressed on the [Initial] screen, the [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] screen as Figure 5-69 is displayed: Figure 5-69 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. ORPF: Displays the [Output RF spectrum] screen. This softkey is not available when the Midamble is set to None or the Signal is set to CW. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-191

330 5 Screen Reference Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). When the trigger mode is set to Cont, continuous measurement starts as soon as the screen of [TX Analyzer] is displayed. The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 3 to select system. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 GSM: This softkey is unavailable. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. CDMA2000: Changes the system to cdma2000. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

331 Screen Reference 5 Screen Fields Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-66 to execute a new test. Table 5-66 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System RFCH * Signal Description Sets whether or not to execute a group of test items. Peak TX Power, Burst Timing, Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS), Phase Error (Peak), Frequency Error (Above items can be measured at Demod: GMSK) EVM (RMS), EVM (Peak), EVM (95%), Frequency Error, Origin Offset Spr. (Above items can be measured at Demod:8PSK, Signal: Burst, Installation of Option G03 is required.) Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Selects CW or Burst of a MS transmission signal. CW: Selects this when a continuous wave is transmitted from the mobile phone. Burst: Selects this when a bursted signal is transmitted from the mobile phone. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-193

332 5 Screen Reference Table 5-66 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Modulation Offset PWR CNTL Amplitude Midamble Demod Averaging Description Selects one of the following modulation modes: (Installation of Option G03 is required for 8PSK.) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Signal Generator. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets the Training Sequence Code (TSC) to 0 to 7, or None for the amplitude triggering. Sets the modulation form of the MS signal. Selects GMSK or 8PSK. Installation of Option G03 is required for 8PSK Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page When None is selected, Phase Error/ Frequency Error cannot be measured N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

333 Screen Reference 5 Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Stand-by] screen: Set mobile phone to TX mode and Press {Trigger}. The word surrounded by {} in the message field denotes the softkey. Explanation Measurement starts by the following ways: When the trigger mode is set to Sing, Press the Trigger softkey on the [Stand-by] screen to start single measurement. Press the Trigger Sing/Cont softkey on the [Stand-by] screen to start continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is set to Cont, Continuous measurement starts on the [Measuring] screen as soon as the screen of [TX Analyzer] is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-195

334 5 Screen Reference Measuring Screen When measurement starts, the [Measuring] screen as Figure 5-70 is displayed. Figure 5-70 [TX Analyzer: Measuring] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, continuous measurement starts. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

335 Screen Reference 5 Message Field The following message is displayed in the message screen on the [Measuring] screen: Press the desired softkey. Result Screen After completion of measurement, a [Stand-by] summary screen showing measurement results is displayed. Pass: Shown on blue background when the measurement result is passed. Fail: Shown on red background when the measurement result is failed. Figure 5-71 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Result Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-197

336 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Spectrum Monitor: Displays the Spectrum Monitor screen. ORFS: Displays the [Output RF spectrum] screen. This softkey is not available when the Midamble is set to None or the Signal is set to CW. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. System >>: Displays the Softkey Menu 3 to select system. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Softkey Menu 3 GSM: This softkey is unavailable. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. CDMA2000: Changes the system to cdma2000. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

337 Screen Reference 5 Screen Field The input field in the screen field can be changed for a new test. Refer to Table 5-66 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Screen Input Field on page Procedure to obtain a Graph/Value screen To obtain a Graph/Value from the summary screen, follow the procedure described below. Step 1 Place the cursor at one of the test items by rotating the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 2 Select the test item by pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Step 3 Either a measurement result list or a graph with a measurement result list is displayed according to each measurement item. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-199

338 5 Screen Reference Graph/Value Screen Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp The measured data are shown in enlarged numerals. The Power Ramp result is shown when the marker is placed at any point on its measured trace. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-72 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

339 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-73 [TZ Analyzer: Stand-by] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Zoomed Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the amplitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-201

340 5 Screen Reference Zoom Off/On: Toggles the zooming function between Off and On. At On setting, the zoomed waveform of rising edge and falling edge are displayed as shown in Figure At the setting of one of Demond: GMSK, the rising edge of the power ramp waveform (-8 to 0bit), and falling edge (147 to 155bit) are displayed. At the setting of one of Demond: 8PSK,the rising edge of the power ramp waveform (-24 to 6 bit), and falling edge (435 to 465 bit) are displayed. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

341 Screen Reference 5 Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-67 [TX Analyzer] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System RFCH * Signal Averaging Midamble PWR CNTL Amplitude * Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the type of the signal under test to CW or Burst. CW: Continuous wave Burst: Burst wave Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. When the average is set to the specified number, the measurement is repeated the specified average times. It also displays the averaged value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error. Sets the Training Sequence Code (TSC) 0 to 7, or None. ". When the TSC is set to None, the measurement is started by the amplitude trigger. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Signal Generator. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-203

342 5 Screen Reference Table 5-67 [TX Analyzer] Peak TX Power/ Burst Timing/ Power Ramp Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Modulation Offset * Demod Description Selects one of the following modulation modes: (Installation of Option G03 is required for 8PSK.) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. Sets the modulation type of the transmission signal from the mobile phone under test to GMSK or 8PSK. The measurement for 8PSKrequires the option G03. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page When None is selected, Phase Error/ Frequency Error cannot be measured. NOTE If the measurement is not triggered, check the following items: Power Control Level (PWR CNTL) is properly set for the mobile phone. Midamble is properly set. If you don't know which Training Sequence Code (TSC) is used, set Midamble to None to use the amplitude trigger mode. A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. The measurement results are shown in the screen field N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

343 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-68 [TX Analyzer] Peak TX Power/Burst Timing/Power Ramp Screen Field Screen Field Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Description Measured Peak TX Power, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Burst Timing, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Power Ramp, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The limits are specified by the radio system selected (template). Phase Error/ Frequency Error The RMS and Peak Phase Error and Frequency Error are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-205

344 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-74 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Phase Error/ Frequency Error Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

345 Screen Reference 5 When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-69 [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-207

346 5 Screen Reference Table 5-69 [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field RFCH * Signal Modulation Offset * PWR CNTL Amplitude * Midamble Demod Description Sets the channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Selects CW or Burst of a MS transmission signal. CW: Selects this when a continuous wave is transmitted from the mobile phone. Burst: Selects this when a bursted signal is transmitted from the mobile phone. Selects one of the following modulation modes: (The 8PSK setting requires the option G03) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Signal Generator. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets the Training Sequence Code (TSC) 0 to 7, or None for the amplitude triggering. Sets the modulation form of the MS signal. Selects GMSK or 8PSK N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

347 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-69 [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Averaging Description Sets the averaging numbers of respective measurements. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 99, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page When None is selected, Phase Error/ Frequency Error cannot be measured. NOTE If the measurement is not triggered, check the following items: Power Control Level (PWR CNTL) is properly set for the mobile phone. Midamble is properly set. If you set to None, Phase Error/ Frequency Error measurement cannot be performed. The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-70 [TX Analyzer] Phase Error/Frequency Error Screen Field Screen Field Phase RMS Phase Peak Marker Freq. Err Description Measured Phase Error (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error (Peak), the HI and the LO Limit are shown. A set of the HI the LO Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Phase Error at the marker position, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. EVM NOTE Install the Option G03 to display EVM screen (EGPRS mode). The RMS, Peak, 95 %, Frequency Error, and Origin Offset are shown along with the marker readout if the marker is activated. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-209

348 5 Screen Reference If the measured data exceeds the limits on the graph, one or more white triangle markers indicate the failed position at the top of the graph frame. Any data indicating a failure is highlighted. Figure 5-75 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] EVM Frequency Error/OOS Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

349 Screen Reference 5 Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from "Sing" to "Cont", continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from "Cont" to "Sing", the measurement is terminated. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-211

350 5 Screen Reference Table 5-71 [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System RFCH * Signal Modulation Offset * EVM Meas. Count Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Selects CW or Burst of a MS transmission signal. CW: Selects this when a continuous wave is transmitted from the mobile phone. Burst: Selects this when a bursted signal is transmitted from the mobile phone. Selects one of the following modulation modes: GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. Sets Measurement Burst during EVM test, ranging from 1 to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

351 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-71 [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field PWR CNTL Amplitude * Midamble Demod Description Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Signal Generator. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets the Training Sequence Code (TSC) 0 to 7, or None for the amplitude triggering. Sets the modulation form of the MS signal. Selects GMSK or 8PSK. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page When None is selected, Phase Error/ Frequency Error cannot be measured. NOTE If the measurement is not triggered, check the following items: Power Control Level (PWR CNTL) is properly set for the mobile phone. Midamble is properly set. If you set to None, Phase Error/ Frequency Error measurement cannot be performed. A Pass/Fail judgment is not given while transmission power is off. The measurement items are shown in the screen field. Table 5-72 [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Field Screen Field EVM RMS EVM Peak EVM 95% Description Measured EVM (RMS) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured EVM (Peak), the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured EVM (95%) and the HI Limit are shown. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-213

352 5 Screen Reference Table 5-72 [TX Analyzer] EVM/Frequency Error/OOS Screen Field (continued) Screen Field Marker Freq. Err OOS Description Measured EVM at the marker position, the HI Limit is shown. Measured data is shown when the marker is placed on the measurement trace. The HI Limit is set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Frequency Error, the HI and the LO Limit are shown. The HI and the LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Measured Origin Offset Spr., Suppression and the LO Limit are shown. The LO Limit are set on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) NOTE Install the Option G03 to display ORFS screen (EGPRS mode). The power of the adjacent channels can be measured. The screen of the Output RF Spectrum (ORFS) shows the measurement result of the Modulation and Switching at the carrier frequency rate of 400 khz and +400 khz N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

353 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-76 [TX Analyzer: Output RF Spectrum] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. To start continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Sing to Cont. To terminate continuous measurement on the [Measuring] screen, change the trigger mode from Cont to Sing. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-215

354 5 Screen Reference This softkey is effective only for changing the trigger mode on the [Stand-by] screen. Trigger: Starts single measurement. This softkey is inactivated on the [Stand-by] screen. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-73 [TX Analyzer] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field Input Field Measuring mode Procedure Radio System RFCH * Description Sets whether or not to execute each group of test items. Select On or Off. Modulation Switching Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. Select a file to recall for a test. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This field cannot be changed on the [Measuring] screen. Sets the channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

355 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-73 [TX Analyzer] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Modulation ORFS.Meas. Count PWR CNTL * Amplitude * Sets the modulation of the input/output signal and the data of the output signal. (The 8PSK setting requires the option G03) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets the number of burst to be measured in the ORFS measurement. This setting is applied for the OPFS measurement both of due to the modulation and due to the switching. The allowable range is from 1 to 200. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The above values may differ according to the Power Class settings. Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Sets the RF output level of the Tester. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. Midamble Sets the training sequence code (TSC) on the output signal. The allowable range is from 0 to 7. Demod Description Sets the modulation of the signal from the mobile phone under test to ether of GMSK and 8PSK. The 8PSK setting requires the option G03. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page The measurement result is displayed in the screen field. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-217

356 5 Screen Reference Table 5-74 [Manual Test] EGPRS Mode ORFS Screen Field Screen Field Modulation Description Displays measured Modulation value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and 400 khz (Lower). Switching Displays measured Switching transient value of carrier frequency at +400 khz (Upper) and 400 khz (Lower). Modulation Type Ref. Power The Modulation Type is shown. The power at the time of measurement is shown. Spectrum Monitor The RF spectrum from fc to fc khz relative to the RFCH frequency is shown with the readout of the frequencies and amplitudes at khz (M1) and khz (M2) offsets. Or, the RF spectrum of fc 100 khz relative to the RFCH frequency is shown with the readout of the frequencies and amplitudes at 67.7 khz (M1), ±0.0 khz (M2) and khz (M3) offsets. The measured data at those frequencies are shown N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

357 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-77 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Span 0-400kHz Screen Figure 5-78 is the [Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor screen for span khz. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-219

358 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-78 [TX Analyzer: Stand-by] Spectrum Monitor Span ±100 khz Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Knob Cur/Marker: Selects the function of the CURSOR CONTROL knob from Cur (cursor) and Marker. Marker Coar/Fine: Selects the marker control from Coar (coarse) and Fine to move the marker with 10 dots (coarse) or 1 dot (fine) resolution. The marker readout for the phase error magnitude and timeslot (in bits) is available at any point of the measured trace. Trigger Sing/Cont: Selects the trigger mode from Sing (single) and Cont (continuous). The Sing mode setting provides single measurement N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

359 Screen Reference 5 When the trigger mode is changed from Sing to Cont, continuous measurement starts. The Cont mode setting provides continuous measurement. When the trigger mode is changed from Cont to Sing, the measurement is terminated. Trigger: Starts single measurement. More (1 of 2): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the previous screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output On/Off: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is displayed at the lower left corner on screen when this is set to On. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Screen Field When Span is se to 0-400, the measurement results as Table 5-75 is shown. Table 5-75 [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor (span 0-400kHz) Screen Field Screen Field Peak Marker * M1: +200kHz M2: +250kHz Description The absolute peak power and frequency are shown. The readout of frequency and amplitude at the marker position is shown as follows when the marker is activated by the Knob Cur/Marker softkey setting: MHz dbm: The absolute frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. ( khz db): The relative frequency and amplitude the marker position are shown. The amplitude at +200 khz and +250 khz offsets relative to the RFCH frequency are shown. * The resolution of the marker on the screen is not equivalent to the measurement resolution. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-221

360 5 Screen Reference When Span is se to ±100, the measurement results as Table 5-76 is shown. Table 5-76 [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor (span ±100kHz) Screen Field Screen Field Peak Marker * M1: khz M2: 0.0 khz M3: khz Description The absolute peak power and frequency are shown. The readout of frequency and amplitude at the marker position is shown as follows when the marker is activated by the Knob Cur/Marker softkey setting: MHz dbm: The absolute frequency and amplitude at the marker position are shown. ( khz db): The relative frequency and amplitude the marker position are shown. The peak amplitudes at M1 (-67.7 khz), M2 (0.0 khz), and M3 (+67.7 khz) relative to the RFCH frequency offsets are shown. * The resolution of the marker on the screen is not equivalent to the measurement resolution. Set the input fields of the following parameters to execute a new test. Table 5-77 [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System RFCH * Measur Range Averaging Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Fixed to Auto. Sets the averaging numbers of respective measurements. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200, or Off. When this function is not required, select Off N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

361 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-77 [TX Analyzer] Spectrum Monitor Screen Input Field Input Field Modulation PWR CNTL * Sets the modulation of the input/output signal and the data of the output signal. (The 8PSK setting requires the option G03) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets one of the factors defined for Power Control Levels according to the Radio System. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850, GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) Set the MS Power Class on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen for the power class of the mobile phone. If the mobile phone does not support the power control function, measurement result is not displayed. Span Sets Span to or ± : f c to f c khz ±100: f c ±100 khz RBW Offset Description Selects either 10 khz or 30 khz resolution bandwidth as follows: 10: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 10 khz. 30: Sets the resolution bandwidth to 30 khz. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-223

362 5 Screen Reference Signal Generator Overview Feature of Signal Generator The Tester is capable to generate RF signal for GSM, GPRS, and EGPRS. NOTE For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Signal Generator Screen When the Signal Generator softkey is pressed on the [Initial], the [Signal Generator] screen as Figure 5-79 is displayed. Figure 5-79 [Signal Generator] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

363 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. RF Output: Selects the RF power output from On and Off. RF On is shown at the lower left corner of screen when this softkey is set to On. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen. Softkey Menu 3 GSM: This softkey is unavailable. W-CDMA: Changes the system to W-CDMA. The W00 option is required. CDMA2000: Changes the system to cdma2000. The C00, C01 and C02 options are required. Cancel: Cancels selecting a system and returns to the Softkey Menu 2. Screen Fields Set the input fields to generate RF signal from the Tester according to the following description of Table Table 5-78 [Signal Generator] Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Radio System RFCH * Amplitude Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range of each Radio System is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the RF output level. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-225

364 5 Screen Reference Table 5-78 [Signal Generator] Screen Input Field Input Field Modulation Offset * Description Sets the modulation of the input/output signal and the data of the output signal. (Installation of Option G03 is required for 8PSK.) GMSK:BCCH GMSK modulation with BCCH data. GMSK:PN9 GMSK modulation with PN9 data. GMSK:PN15 GMSK modulation with PN15 data. GMSK:All0 GMSK modulation with all-zero data. GMSK:All1 GMSK modulation with all-one data. 8PSK:PN9: GMSK modulation with PN9 data. 8PSK:PN15: GMSK modulation with PN15 data. AM Applies AM modulation to carrier. Sets frequency offset of the output signal. The allowable range is to khz in 0.1 khz resolution. * The toggling magnification softkey menu is displayed. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

365 Screen Reference 5 Configuration Feature of Configuration In this mode, there are four major functions as follows: Configuration Test Sequence Configuration Test Condition Configuration File Management NOTE For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Configuration Screen When the Config softkey is pressed on the [Initial] screen, the [Configuration] screen as Figure 5-80 is displayed. The following various condition are set on the [Configuration] screen: Execution sequence of Automatic Test Test parameters Relevant to I/F Other setting N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-227

366 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-80 [Configuration] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Test Sequence: Displays the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. Test Condition: Displays the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. File Management: Displays the [Configuration: File Management] screen. Network Setting: Displays the [Network Setting] screen. More (1 of 3): Displays the Softkey Menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Initial] screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

367 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. More (2 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 3. Softkey Menu 2 Debug Data > USB: Outputs debug data into a USB memory device. More (3 of 3): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. If the option E00 and the option E02 are not installed, setting items for GP-IB are grayed out (disabled) as Table Figure 5-81 Part of the [Configuration] Screen (without Option E00 and E02) If the option E01 is not installed, setting items for the serial port are grayed out (disabled) as Table Figure 5-82 Part of the [Configuration] Screen (without Option E01) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-229

368 5 Screen Reference Screen Fields Set the input fields to use the Tester according to the following description of Table Table 5-79 [Configuration] Screen Input Field Input Field Procedure Panel Key Serial Port Description Displays a list of parameter file names stored in the Tester. If the Tester is using a parameter file, the file name is displayed in this field. If the Tester contains parameter files, a list of those filename is displayed in this field for selection. Restricts the acceptance of system setting on the front panel of the Tester. Selects Lock or Unlock. Lock: The following functions are unavailable. Manual Test, TX Analyzer, Signal Generator TCH and BCCH in Automatic Test Test Sequence, Test Condition, and File Management in the Configuration mode. Unlock: No restriction for setting on the front panel of the Tester. Sets the serial (RS-232C) port communication condition to use external control. This function is unavailable without Option E01. Baud Rate: Sets communication speed to 9600, 19200, 38400, or bits per second. Data Length: Sets data bit length to 7 or 8 bits. Stop Bits: Sets stop bit length to 1, 1.5 or 2 bits. Parity: Sets parity check mode to None, Odd or Even. Xcontrol: Sets flow control to None or Xon/Xoff. Reboot the Tester after changing the Serial Port setting. GP-IB* Sets GP-IB port condition. This function is unavailable without Option E00 or Option E02. Address: Sets the address. The allowable range is from 1 to 15. EOI: Sets EOI control. Select On or Off. On: Enables EOI control. (Terminate character is invalid). Off: Disables EOI control. (Terminate character is valid). Reboot the Tester after changing GP-IB setting. Terminator Date/ Time * Sets a terminator of output text data to CR, LF or CR+LF. This is the Terminator output from the Tester. This setting is used for remote control with Serial, Ethernet and GP-IB. The Terminator of input text data for: GPIB option E00: set to CR+LF GPIB option E02: set to LF Sets the current date and time in the following formats: YYYY: Sets the year. The allowable range is from 1990 to MM: Sets the month. The allowable range is from 01 to 12. DD: Sets the day. The allowable range is from 01 to 31. HH: Sets the hour. The allowable range is from 00 to 23. MM: Sets the minute. The allowable range is from 00 to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

369 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-79 [Configuration] Screen Input Field Input Field Printer Beeper Description Sets the output direction of print screen to USB Memory or EPSON PM-G800. USB Memory: Saves an image file of screen in a USB memory device. The image format is PNG. EPSON PM-G800: Prints a hardcopy of screen in the specified printer. Sets beep. Selects On or OFF. On: Beeps for each step of operation. OFF: Beeps are suppressed. * the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Also, the following information is displayed in the screen field: MAC address Serial No. FW revision number of the RF-CPU The version number of the MX-1x CPU. This is displayed only when the options C00 and C01 are installed. The version number of the 1xEV-DO CPU. This is displayed only when the options C00, C01, and C02 are installed. Option: Shows the option numbers which is/are installed in the Tester. Configuration: Test Sequence Screen When the Test Sequence softkey on the [Configuration] screen is pressed, the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen as Figure 5-83 is displayed. Configure a test sequence for executing Automatic Test on this screen. The attenuation values set on the [Configuration] screen are used for compensating the path losses between the mobile phone and the Tester for each radio system; however, if the attenuation has frequency or channel dependency in one radio system, you can correct the RF test results with the attenuation values set on this screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-231

370 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-83 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Return: Returns to the [Configuration] screen. Automatic Test Flow For setting a test flow to execute Automatic Test, refer to the following itemized explanation and Table N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

371 Screen Reference 5 For Location Update: Select Lu1 to execute MS Power On Location Update, Lu2 to execute BS Change Location Update, or --- to skip the step in the test flow. For Call and Release: Select BS or MS. For other steps: Select Run to execute the step or to skip the step in the test flow. Table 5-80 Setting Combination for Automatic Test Flow Step Sequence Test 1 Location Update Lu1/Lu2 Lu1/Lu2 Lu1/Lu2 Lu1/Lu2 2 MS Call/BS Call Run Run Run Run 3 Talk Run/ Run/ Run/ Run/ 4 RF Test Run/ Run/ Run/ Run/ 5 MS Release/BS Release/Handover Run Run Run Run 6 MS Call/BS Call Run Run Run Run 7 MS Release/BS Release Run Run Run Run Screen Fields Set the input fields of the following parameters for a new test sequence for executing Automatic Test. Table 5-81 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field Input Field Description Test items Specifies execution or skip at each step. Refer to Table 5-80 on the page Radio System Sequence No RF Output Selects the radio system of sequence 1 at 1:, and sequence 2 at 2: from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Sets the sequence number to set test items. Sets the RF output for Automatic Test. Select Auto or On. Auto: Outputs RF signal only during measurement. On: Outputs RF signal while an [Auto Test] screen is displayed. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-233

372 5 Screen Reference Table 5-81 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field Input Field Release Delay 3GPP System BCCH * TCH * Detail of RF Test Description Sets the delay time from the Release of the test step 5 to the signaling of the test step 6 in Automatic Test flow. The allowable range is from 0 to 9 sec in 1 sec step. Used for W-CDMA and cdma2000. The setting item is available in the Sequence1 screen for each Radio System. Sets the broadcast control channel number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 Sets the traffic channel number for Talk step. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 TCH: Sets up to six traffic channels number. The allowable range is as follows: GSM850: 128 to 251 GSM900: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 DCS1800: 512 to 885 PCS1900: 512 to 810 RF Test item: Sets execution or skip of Pass/Fail test. Refer to Table 5-82 for details. ATT In and ATT Out: Sets the insertion losses caused by the coupler or cable connecting the RF signals from/to the mobile phone. Depending on transmitter and receiver testing it is required to set loss values in the ATT In and ATT Out fields as follows: ATT In: Sets the traffic channel attenuation values for transmitter testing. The allowable range is from -9.9 to +9.9 db in 0.1 db steps. ATT Out: Sets the traffic channel attenuation for receiver testing. The allowable range is from -9.9 to +9.9 db in 0.1 db steps. The sum of Loss setting value and ATT setting value should be greater than 0. The value less than 0 is ineffective. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page Set Loss to On on the [Configuration] screen to activate the change of ATT setting. * The changing magnification softkey menu is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

373 Screen Reference 5 The following measurement items need to be set to Run to execute a Pass or Fail test or to (skip) to skip a Pass/Fail test, for each channel, respectively. Table 5-82 Configuration: Test Sequence Measurement Item Measurement Item Peak TX Power (High, Mid, Low) Burst Timing Power Ramp Phase Error (RMS, Peak) Frequency Error Sensitivity (BER, FER) RX Quality RX Level Description Sets execution or skip the Peak TX Power test for the High, Mid, and Low levels. The MS power class and the power control levels for the High, Mid, and Low levels are defined on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets execution or skip the Burst Timing test. Sets execution or skip the Power Ramp test. Sets execution or skip the Phase Error test. Sets execution or skip the Frequency Error test. Sets execution or skip the Sensitivity test in BER and FER. The BS level and the number of test frames are defined in the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen. Sets execution or skip the RX Quality test. Sets execution or skip the RX Level test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-235

374 5 Screen Reference Configuration: Test Condition Screen When the Test Condition softkey on the [Configuration] screen is pressed, the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen as Figure 5-84 for GSM mode or Figure 5-85 for GPRS mode or Figure 5-86 for EGPRS mode is displayed depending on the GSM Mode setting. Figure 5-84 [Configuration: Test Condition] (GSM) Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

375 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-85 [Configuration: Test Condition] (GPRS) Screen Figure 5-86 [Configuration: Test Condition] (EGPRS) Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-237

376 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Loss: Proceeds to [Configuration: Test Condition(Loss)] screen. Limit: Displays [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] screen. Return: Returns to the [Configuration] screen. NOTE Install the Option G03 before using EGPRS function. Screen Fields Set the input fields of the parameters for Automatic Test, Manual Test, and TX Analyzer according to the description of Table Table 5-83 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field Input Field Current System Radio System GSM Mode 3GPP System Description Displays an active Tester. Selects a test mode from GSM, W-CDMA and CDMA2000. W-CDMA is valid when W00 Option is installed in the Tester. CDMA2000 is valid when cdma2000 Option is installed in the Tester. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. This setting is for Manual Test, TX Analyzer, and Signal Generator. Selects GSM or GPRS or EGPRS. This setting is for Manual Test. The value is simultaneously changes corresponding to 3GPP System of W-CDMA N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

377 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-83 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Network BS Level BER BS Level (GSM mode) Data Loopback Delay (GSM Mode) Connection Wait (GSM mode) LocUpdate (Attach) Delay (GSM/GPRS/EGPRS mode) Test Loop (GSM mode) Coding Scheme (GSM/GPRS/EGPRS mode) Test Mode (GPRS/EGPRS mode) Description Sets the network parameters. Setting these parameters is required when you test a mobile phone using a user SIM instead of a test SIM or when you want to test network capability. MCC: Sets Mobile Country Code. The allowable range is from 000 to 999. Set 001 for using Test SIM supplied by Agilent Technologies. MNC: Sets Mobile Network Code. The allowable range is from 00 to 99. Set 01 for using Test SIM supplied by Agilent Technologies. NCC: Sets Network Color Code. The allowable range is from 0 to 7. LAC: Sets Location Area Code. The allowable range is from 0 to BS_PA_MFRAMS: Sets the number of multiframes between two transmissions of the same paging message (BS_PA_MFRMS). The allowable range is from 2 to 9. This setting is for Automatic Test and Manual Test. Sets the RF output level of the Tester except for the sensitivity test. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. This setting is for Automatic Test, Manual Test and Signal Generator. Sets the RF output level of the Tester for the sensitivity test. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. This setting is for Automatic Test and Manual Test (GSM mode). Sets the data of the output signal from the Tester to either PN9, PN9Fix or PN15. This setting is for Automatic Test and Manual Test. Sets the delay time at the audio loop back mode to either Short, Mid or Long. This setting is for Automatic Test and Manual Test. Sets the connection wait time for response from the mobile phone at the MS CALL. The allowable range is from 1 to 120 sec in 1 sec step. This setting is for Manual Test (GSM mode). Sets the wait time after Location Update (GSM Mode) and Attach (GPRS and EGPRS modes) process. The allowable range is from 0 to 9 sec in 1 sec step. This setting is for Manual and Automatic Test. Sets the Test Loop of A or C. This setting is for Manual Test. Sets the Coding Scheme of PDTCH data (uplink and downlink). Selects from CS1 to CS4 (GPRS) and MCS1 to MCS9 (EGPRS). This setting is for Manual Test. Sets the Test Mode to either ACK, A, B, or SRB. The available measurement depends on the mode. ACK: Measurement of Max TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and BLER A: Measurement of Max TX Power, Phase Error, and Frequency Error and EVM B: Measurement of Max TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and EVM. Active in Unacknowledged Mode for UL/DL. SRB: Measurement of Max TX Power, Phase Error, Frequency Error, and EVM and BER. (SRB is available only at EGPRS mode) This setting is for Manual Test. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-239

378 5 Screen Reference Table 5-83 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field Puncturing Scheme (EGPRS mode) Inc Redund (EGPRS mode) MS Power Class PWR CNTL * (High, Mid, Low, Manual Test) Averaging BER Frames (GSM mode) Fast BER Frames (GSM mode) BLER Frames (GPRS/EPGRS mode) Description Sets the Puncturing Scheme of PDTCH data (downlink). Selects from either P1, P2 or P3. P3 setting is available only when the Coding Scheme is set to either MCS3, MCS4, MCS7, MCS8 or MCS9. This setting is for Manual Test. Sets Incremental Redundancy capability of the retransmission PDTCH to On or Off at Test Mode: Ack test. This setting is for Manual Test. Sets MS power class. The allowable ranges are as follows: GSM850: 2 to 5 GSM900: 2 to 5 DCS1800: 1 to 3 PCS1900: 1 to 3 This setting is for Automatic Test, Manual Test, and TX Analyzer. Sets three power control levels for the High, Mid and Low levels for the Automatic Test mode, Set a Power Control Level for the Manual Test mode and TX Analyzer mode, The allowable ranges for each Radio System are as follows: GSM850: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) GSM900: 2 to 19 (+39dBm to +5dBm) DCS1800: 29 to 15 (+36dBm to 0dBm) PCS1900: 30 to 15 (+33dBm to 0dBm) The allowable range depends on the power class of the mobile phone under test and on the MS Power Class setting. Displays the average value of Peak TX Power, Phase Error and Frequency Error. Sets the averaging number from 2 to 200 or Off. When this function is not required, select Off. This setting is for Automatic Test, Manual Test, and TX Analyzer. Also, this setting can be done on the [Manual Test] and the [TX Analyzer] screens. Sets the number of test frames. The allowable range is from 1 to The number of test bits, calculated from the equation Test Frames multiplied by 78 bits (Class II) or Test Frames multiplied by 132 bits (Class Ib) is displayed in the parentheses. This setting is for Automatic Test and Manual Test (GSM mode). Sets the number of test frames. The allowable range is from 1 to The number of test bits, calculated from the equation Test Frames multiplied by 456 bits is displayed in the parentheses. This setting is for Manual Test (GSM mode). Sets the number of test frames. The allowable range is from 1 to This setting is for Manual Test (GPRS/EPGRS mode) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

379 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-83 [Configuration: Test Sequence] Screen Input Field (continued) Input Field BER Frames (GPRS mode) SRB Frames (EGPRS mode) Sens BS Level (GPRS/EPGRS mode) Description Sets the number of test frames for BER measurement. BER measurement is available when Test Mode is set to B. The allowable range is from 1 to The number of test bits, derived from the following equation is displayed in the parentheses. Coding Scheme CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 This setting is for Manual Test (GPRS mode). Equation BER Frames x 160 bits BER Frames x 240 bits BER Frames x 288 bits BER Frames x 400 bits Sets the number of test frames for SRB Loopback BER measurement. SRB Loopback measurement is available when Test Mode is set up "SRB". Allowable setting ranges are from 1 to 1300 (by 1 step). The number of test bits which is found by calculating formula as follows by Coding Scheme (hereinafter referred to as MCS) is displayed on the screen. Coding Scheme MCS1 to MCS4 MCS5 and MCS6 MCS7 to MCS9 This setting is for Manual Test (EGPRS mode). Equation BER Frames x 372 bits BER Frames x 1284 bits BER Frames x 1224 bits Sets the RF output level of the Tester for the Sensitivity test. The allowable range is from to dbm in 0.1 db steps. This setting is for Manual Test (GPRS/EGPRS mode). EVM Meas Count This item is displayed when GSM Mode is set to EGPRS. Setting range is from 1 to 20. * Set the MS Power Class to the power class of the mobile phone under the test. If the mobile phone does not support the PWR CNTL, measurement result is not displayed. In the Automatic Test mode, the High value is used for the Burst Timing, Power Ramp, Phase Error and Frequency Error measurements. The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-241

380 5 Screen Reference Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) When the Loss softkey is pressed, [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] as Figure 5-87 is displayed. Figure 5-87 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Return: Returns to [Configuration] screen. Screen Fields N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

381 Screen Reference 5 Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-84 to execute a new test. Table 5-84 [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] Screen Input Field Input Field Loss * Description Sets the path losses caused by the coupler or cable used to connect the RF signals from or to the mobile phone with each radio systems, respectively. Selects On or Off. On: Adds a set path loss value of RF In/Out. Select On to activate the change of ATT setting on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen. Off: Not add the path loss value. Depending on transmitter testing and receiver testing, set loss values in the RF In and RF Out fields as follows: RF In: Sets the traffic channel loss values for transmitter testing. The allowable range is from 0.0 to 99.9dB in 0.1dB steps. RF Out: Sets the traffic channel loss for receiver testing. The allowable range is from 0.0 to 99.9 db in 0.1dB steps. The sum of Loss setting value and ATT setting value has some limitation. Refer to Actual Input/Output Level and Correction on page * The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Configuration: Test Condition (Limit) Screen When Limit softkey is pressed on the [Configuration: Test Condition] screen, Either of three screens as shown as Figure 3.88, and 3.90 appears in accordance with the setting of GSM mode. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-243

382 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-88 [Configuration (GSM): Test Condition (Limit) Figure 5-89 [Configuration (GPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

383 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-90 [Configuration (EGPRS): Test Condition (Limit)] Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. Return: Returns to [Configuration] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-245

384 5 Screen Reference Screen Fields Set the input fields in the screen field according to the following description of Table 5-85 to execute a new test. Table 5-85 [Configuration: Test Condition (Limit)] Screen Input Field Input Field Current System Radio System GSM Mode Description Displays a system being run. Select the test mode from GSM, W-CDMA or CDMA2000. W-CDMA is valid when the W00 option is installed. CDMA2000 is valid when the C00 option, C01 option and C02 option (1xEV-DO) is installed. Selects a radio system from GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. Selects GSM, GPRS or EGPRS. This setting is for Manual Test. LO/HI Limit Sets the test limits. Refer to Setting Measurement Limits for Measurement Items" on page Setting Measurement Limits for Measurement Items The LO Limit and HI Limit values for the measurement items in the table need to be set to execute Pass/Fail tests by Automatic Test, Manual Test, and TX Analyzer. All measurement items can be set with limits to execute Pass/Fail tests on the [Configuration: Test Sequence] screen (even if some measurement items are skipped). The changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page Table 5-86 Configuration: Test Condition Measurement Item Measurement Item Peak TX Power Burst Timing Power Ramp Description Sets a high and a low measurement limit of Peak TX Power. The nominal limits are specified depending on the radio system and the power control level (PWR CNTL). You can change the nominal limits can be changed by entering temporary limits ranging from to db in 0.1 steps. However, once power control level is changed after this modification, the nominal limits are automatically set. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of Burst Timing. The allowable range is from -9.9 to +9.9 bits in 0.1 steps. The test limits of Power Ramp are automatically specified depending on the radio system selected N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

385 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-86 Configuration: Test Condition Measurement Item Measurement Item Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error Sensitivity/BER Class Ib, Class II (GSM mode) Sensitivity/Fast BER (GSM mode) Sets a high and a low measurement limit of Phase Error (RMS). The allowable range is from +0.0 to in 0.1º steps. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of Phase Error (Peak). The allowable range is from to in 0.1º steps. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of Frequency Error. The allowable range is from to Hz in 0.1 Hz step. Sets a high measurement limit of Sensitivity/BER Class I b and Class II. The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high measurement limit of Sensitivity/Fast BER. The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sensitivity/FER (GSM mode) Sets a high measurement limit of Sensitivity/FER. The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. RX Quality (GSM mode) Sets a high and a low measurement limit of RX Quality. The allowable range is 0 to 7. RX Level (GSM mode) Sets a high and a low measurement limit of RX Level. The allowable range is 0 to 63. Sensitivity/BLER (GPRS/EGPRS mode) Sensitivity/BER (GPRS/EGPRS mode) Sensitivity/SRB Loopback (EGPRS mode) EVM (RMS) (EGPRS mode) EVM (Peak) (EGPRS mode) EVM (95%) (EGPRS mode) ORFS ORFS Mod ORFS SW Description Sets a high measurement limit of Sensitivity/BLER. The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high measurement limit of Sensitivity/BER. The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high and a high measurement limit of Sensitivity BER. The allowable range is from is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of EVM (RMS). The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of EVM (Peak). The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets a high and a low measurement limit of EVM (95%). The allowable range is from 0.00 to % in 0.01 % steps. Sets the ORFS Mod Type in accordance with the GSM Mode setting. At GSM or GPRS mode, the settingis fixed to GSMK. At EGPRS mode, the allowable setting is either of GSMK and 8PSK. Sets a high measurement limit of ORFS Mod. The allowable range is from to 0.0 dbm in 0.1 db steps. Sets a high measurement limit of ORFS SW. The allowable range is from to 0.0 dbm in 0.1 db steps. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-247

386 5 Screen Reference Configuration: File Management When the File Mngement softkey is pressed, the [Configuration: File Management] Screen as shown in Figure 5-91 is displayed. All parameter files are listed in the table. You can save/recall a parameter file to/from the following two devices: A USB memory device HDD in the Tester Select the device you want to use by pressing the HDD/USB softkey. NOTE If you use a USB memory device, insert a proper USB memory device into the USB Connector on the front panel of the Tester. Figure 5-91 [Configuration: File Management] Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

387 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu 1 Save: Saves a file including all test parameters which are currently set into the HDD or a USB memory device. Refer to Saving a Test Setup File on page Recall: Recall one of the test parameter files from the HDD or a USB memory device into the Tester. Refer to Saving a Test Setup File on page Delete: Deletes the test parameter file selected by the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Refer to Deleting a Test Setup File on page File System:.Selects file system from MULTI, GSM (previous revision format) or W-CDMA (previous version format). When you save a test parameter file containing the cdma2000 system information, select the MULTI. HDD/USB: Selects the HDD in the Tester or a USB memory device. More (1 of 2): Displays the softkey menu 2. Return: Returns to the [Configuration] screen. Softkey Menu 2 Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or saves a graphic file of the screen in a USB memory device depending on the setting of the Printer input field on the [Configuration] screen. File Replace HDD < USB: This softkey is displayed when HDD is selected with the HDD/USB softkey. Displays the File Replace screen when this softkey is pressed. Refer to Replacing Test Setup Files (HDD is selected) on page This softkey is available when the following conditions are met. A USB memory device is inserted into the Tester. Test setup file is saved in the HDD. File Replace HDD > USB: This softkey is displayed when USB is selected with the HDD/USB softkey. Displays the File Replace screen when this softkey is pressed. Refer to Replacing Test Setup Files (HDD is selected) on page This softkey is available when the following conditions are met. A USB memory device contained the test setup file is inserted into the Tester. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-249

388 5 Screen Reference Undo: Displays the screen to confirm Undo (operation cancels). Refer to Undo Confirmation (HDD is selected)" on page and Undo Confirmation (USB Memory Device is selected)" on page 5-271This softkey is available when the following conditions are met. Replace files are existed in the HDD when the HDD is selected. Replace files are existed in the USB memory device, when a USB memory device is selected. More (2 of 2): Returns to the Softkey Menu 1. Message Field When an error occurs during file copying, the following message is displayed in the message field. Table 5-87 Error Messages of the File Management Message Procedure file Copy failure! [0000] Procedure file Copy failure! [0001] Procedure file Copy failure! [0002] Description Copy failed Delete failed Rename failed Saving a Test Setup File Save a new parameter file with the following procedure: Step 1 If you save a file including all parameters that are currently set in a USB memory device, go to Step 2. Or, go to Step 3 to save a file to the HDD N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

389 Screen Reference 5 Step 2 Insert a USB memory device into the USB Connector on the front panel of the Tester. Step 3 Select a device you want to use to save a parameter file by toggling the HDD/USB softkey. The selected device, either HDD or USB, is underlined. Step 4 Move the cursor to the file number to which you want to save a new test parameter file. Figure 5-92 [Configuration: File Management] Save-1 Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-251

390 5 Screen Reference Step 5 Press the Save softkey. The Filename and Comment fields are highlighted, and the cursor is placed at the Filename field. At this time, a default file name is automatically displayed in the Filename field. If you want to change the file name, go to Step 6. If you do not change the file name, go to Step 9. Figure 5-93 [Configuration: File Management] Save-2 Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Save Now: Saves the parameter file in the HDD or USB memory device. Press this softkey after entering a filename and comment. Cancel: Cancels saving and returns to the screen in Step N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

391 Screen Reference 5 Step 6 To edit the File name, press the CURSOR CONTROL knob once to activate the Editor scrolling field. The rectangular cursor is placed at the first position of the Filename field enabling you to enter the first character of the filename. Figure 5-94 [Configuration: File Management] Save-3 Screen Step 7 Selects alphanumeric characters and other symbols by rotating and pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob to edit a filename. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-253

392 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-95 [Configuration: File Management] Save-4 Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Done: Determines the words entered. Cancel: Cancels editing. Caps On/Off: Selects upper case or lower case of characters. On: Selects upper case character Off: Selects lower case character Over/Ins: Selects Over (overwrite) or Ins (insert). Over: Overwrite (erase and replace) characters selected. Ins: Insert characters at the position of the rectangular cursor without erasing the existing characters. Back Space: Erases a character at the left side of the rectangular cursor N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

393 Screen Reference 5 Step 8 Press the Done softkey to enter the filename edited. Step 9 To create a comment, move the cursor to the Comment field and press it once. The rectangular cursor is placed at the first position of the Comment field enabling you to enter the first character of a comment. Create a comment with similar operation to that for editing a file name. Refer to Step 7 and Step 8 to complete creating a comment. Figure 5-96 [Configuration: File management] Save-5 Screen N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-255

394 5 Screen Reference Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Save Now: Executes saving. Cancel: Cancels entering and returns to the screen in Step 5. Step 10 After entering the new file name and comment, press the Save Now softkey to execute saving. Step 11 If saving is properly done, the new filename should be displayed in the filename table with the Date and Time data that are automatically taken from the internal clock of the Tester. NOTE Remove the USB memory device after returning to the [Configuration] screen by pressing the Return softkey. The USB memory device should not be removed while the [File Management] screen is displayed. Otherwise, the parameter files may be damaged. Confirmation message as Figure 5-97 is displayed when you select an existing file and save it as the same file name N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

395 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-97 [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Save Now: Executes saving. Cancel: Cancels entering and returns to the screen in Step 4. Message Field The following message is displayed in the message field on the [Configuration: File Management] screen: A same name file already exist. OK to overwrite?. Recalling a Test Setup File Recall one of the parameter files with the following procedure: N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-257

396 5 Screen Reference Step 1 If you recall a file containing test parameters from a USB memory device, go to Step 2. Or, go to Step 3 to recall a file from the HDD. Step 2 Insert a USB memory device into the USB Connector to obtain the parameter file list. Step 3 Select a device you use to recall a test parameter file by pressing the HDD/USB softkey. The selected device, either HDD or USB, is underlined. Step 4 Move the cursor to the file number to which you want to recall the test parameter file N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

397 Screen Reference 5 Figure 5-98 [Configuration: File Management] Recall-1 Screen Step 5 Press the Recall softkey, and then the Filename, Date, Time and Comment fields are highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-259

398 5 Screen Reference Figure 5-99 [Configuration: File Management] Recall-2 Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Yes: Executes restoring the parameter file. No: Cancels recalling the parameter file and returns to Step 4. Step 6 Respond to the operation message Ok to recall? in the message field by pressing the Yes softkey. If there is something to revise, press the No softkey to go back to Step N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

399 Screen Reference 5 Step 7 If the file is correctly recalled to the Tester, the Procedure: field above the table shows the filename. The cursor is placed next to the file number. The softkey menu returns to the initial menu. Figure [Configuration: File Management] Recall-3 Screen NOTE Remove the USB memory device after returning to the [Configuration] screen by pressing the Return softkey. The USB memory device should not be removed while the [File Management] screen is displayed. Otherwise, the parameter files may be damaged. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-261

400 5 Screen Reference Deleting a Test Setup File Delete one of the parameter files with the following procedure: Step 1 If you delete a file containing test parameters from a USB memory device, go to Step 2. Or, go to Step 3 to delete a file from the HDD. Step 2 Insert a USB memory device into the USB Connector to obtain the parameter file list. Step 3 Select a device which you want to delete the test parameter file by pressing the HDD/USB softkey. The selected device, either HDD or USB, is underlined. Step 4 Move the cursor to the file number of which you want to delete the test parameter file N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

401 Screen Reference 5 Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-1 Screen Step 5 Press the Delete softkey, and then the Filename, Date, Time and Comment fields are highlighted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-263

402 5 Screen Reference Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-2 Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Yes:Executes deleting the parameter file. No:Cancels deleting the parameter file and returns to Step 4. Step 6 Respond to the operation message Ok to delete? in the message field by pressing the Yes softkey. Or, press the No softkey to go back to Step N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

403 Screen Reference 5 Step 7 When deleting is properly done, the file disappears and the softkey menu returns to the initial menu. Figure [Configuration: File Management] Delete-3 Screen NOTE Remove the USB memory device after returning to the [Configuration] screen by pressing the Return softkey. The USB memory device should not be removed while the [File Management] screen is displayed. Otherwise, the parameter files may be damaged. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-265

404 5 Screen Reference Replacing Test Setup Files (HDD is selected) When copying all the test parameter files to a USB memory device, select the HDD with the HDD/USB softkey, and then, press the More (1 of 2) and File Replace HDD > USB softkeys on the [Configuration: File Management] screen. File Replace Screen (HDD is selected) shown in Figure is displayed. NOTE After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the USB memory device are deleted. Figure File Replace Screen (HDD is selected) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

405 Screen Reference 5 Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Replace Now HDD > USB: Copies all the test parameter files from the HDD to a USB memory device. Cancel: Cancels copying and returns to the [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen as Figure 5-97 on page Screen Field The following message is displayed in the screen field: The selecting procedure file is copied from the hard disk to a USB memory device. When this operation is done, all existing procedure files in the USB memory device are deleted. NOTE All replaced files can be restored using the Undo function when you replace all test parameter files from the HDD to a USB memory device. Refer to Undo Screen (USB memory device is selected) on page for details. If copying operation failed, the [File Management] screen is displayed and an error message is displayed in the message field. Refer to Table 5-87 Error Messages of the File Management on page Replacing Test Setup Files (USB Memory Device is selected) When copying all the test parameter files to the HDD, select USB with the HDD/USB softkey, and then, press the More (1 of 2) and File Replace HDD < USB softkeys on the [Configuration: File Management] screen. The File Replace Screen (USB memory device is selected) shown in Figure is displayed. NOTE After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the HDD memory device are deleted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-267

406 5 Screen Reference Figure File Replace Screen (USB memory device is selected) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Replace Now HDD < USB: Copies all the test parameter files from the USB memory device to the HDD. Cancel: Cancels copying and returns to the [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen as Figure 5-97 on page Screen Field The following message is displayed in the screen field: The selecting procedure file is copied from a USB memory device to the hard disk. When this operation is done, all existing procedure files in the hard disk are deleted N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

407 Screen Reference 5 NOTE All replaced files can be restored using the Undo function when you replace all test parameter files from the HDD to a USB memory device. Refer to Undo Screen (USB memory device is selected) on page for details. If copying operation failed, the [File Management] screen is displayed and an error message is displayed in the message field. Refer to Table 5-87 Error Messages of the File Management on page Undo Confirmation (HDD is selected) You can restore all replaced files using Undo function when you replaced all the test parameter files from a USB memory device to the HDD. Select the HDD with the HDD/USB softkey, and then, press the More (1 of 2) and Undo softkeys on the [Configuration: File Management] screen. The Undo Screen (HDD is selected) shown in Figure is displayed. NOTE After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the HDD memory device are deleted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-269

408 5 Screen Reference Figure Undo Screen (HDD is selected) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Undo Now HDD: Restores all the test parameter files in the HDD before the file replace operation was executed. After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the HDD are deleted. Cancel: Cancels copying and returns to the [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen as Figure 5-97 on page Screen Field The following message is displayed in the screen field: N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

409 Screen Reference 5 Previous procedure files, which are the files before File Replace HDD <- USB operation, are restored into the hard desk. When this operation is done, all existing procedure files in the hard disk are deleted. Undo Confirmation (USB Memory Device is selected) You can restore all replaced files using Undo function when you replaced all the test parameter files from the HDD to a USB memory device. Select the USB with the HDD/USB softkey, and then, press the More (1 of 2) and Undo softkeys on the [Configuration: File Management] screen. The Undo Screen (USB memory device is selected) shown in Figure is displayed. NOTE After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the USB memory device are deleted. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-271

410 5 Screen Reference Figure Undo Screen (USB memory device is selected) Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Undo Now USB: Restores all the test parameter files in the USB memory device before the file replace operation was executed. After this operation, all existing test parameter files in the USB are deleted. Cancel: Cancels copying and returns to the [Configuration: File management] Overwrite Screen as Figure 5-97 on page Screen Field The following message is displayed in the screen field: Previous procedure files, which are the files before File Replace HDD -> USB operation, are restored into the USB memory device. When this operation is done, all existing procedure files in the USB memory device are deleted N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

411 Screen Reference 5 Configuration: Network Setting When the Network Setting softkey on the [Configuration] screen is pressed, the [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen as in Figure is displayed. Figure [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the Printer field on the [Configuration] screen. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-273

412 5 Screen Reference Apply Address: Applies the changes of IP Addr, Mask, Default Gateway, Host/Net, Gateway, and CIDR to the Tester. This softkey is not activated when the [Network Setting] screen is displayed and no setting is changed. This softkey is activated when any input field is changed. After applying the settings, this softkey is inactivated again. Cancel: Returns to the [Configuration] screen. Values changed before pressing the Apply Address softkey are reverted to the former values. Screen Field The following input fields need to be set to use the Tester according to the following description of Table Table 5-88 [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen Input Field IP Addr CIDR (Mask) Description Sets the IP address of the Tester. Allowable setting value is as follows: to (From to are unavailable to the setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The default IP address is " ". If the IP address setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. Changes to the IP address is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Sets the subnet mask in CIDR format. Allowable setting value is as follows: 1 to 31 The default mask value is 24 ( ). If the mask value setting fails, "Invalid" is displayed in the Status field. Changes to the mask setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Refer to Appendix A on page A-1 for details N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

413 Screen Reference 5 Table 5-88 [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen (continued) Input Field Default Gateway Description Sets active or inactive of the Default Gateway setting, and sets the Default Gateway address. The allowable settings are as follows: None: Default Gateway setting is inactivated. ACT: Default Gateway setting is activated. When None is selected, the address setting field is grayed out and inactivated to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The Default Gateway setting is valid when you set the allowable Default Gateway address, and the Tester and the Default Gateway belong to the same network. When the Tester and Default Gateway do not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed in the Status field because the routing from the Tester cannot be resolved. If the Default Gateway is set to None when booting, the address is displayed as ( ), which means invalid. When the Default Gateway setting fails, Invalid is displayed in the Status field. The Default Gateway setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Setting 1 to 5 Host/Net Sets Act/None (active/inactive) of gateway settings from 1 to 5. The allowable setting is as follows: None: The Gateway setting is inactivated. ACT: The Gateway setting is activated. The Gateway setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. When None is selected, the address setting field is grayed out and unavailable. Sets the destination host or network addresses for gateway setting from 1 to 5. Allowable settings are as follows: When Host address is specified (When the CIDR is set to None.): to (From to are unavailable to setting.) When Network address is specified (When the CIDR is not set to None): to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). When the Gateway setting fails, Invalid is displayed in the Status field. The Host/Net setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. If the CIDR is set to None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as a host address. If the CIDR is set to value other than None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as the network address. In this case, the address of Host part is set to 0. If it specifies the value other than 0, Invalid is displayed in the Status field. The address setting is automatically changed to when the address was set to and the Host/Net setting is changed from network to host. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 5-275

414 5 Screen Reference Table 5-88 [Configuration: Network Setting] Screen (continued) Input Field Gateway CIDR Description Sets the Gateway addresses for gateway setting from 1 to 5. Allowable settings are as follows: to (From to are unavailable to setting.) The IP address setting supports Class A through Class C. The Tester does not support Class D (multicast address) and Class E (reserved address). The gateway setting is valid when you set the allowable address, and the Tester and the Gateway belong to the same network. If the Gateway is set to None when booting, the address is displayed as ( ), which means invalid. When the Tester and Gateway do not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed in the Status field. The Gateway setting is effective after the pressing the Apply Address softkey. Sets the subnet masks for the destination address in CIDR format from Setting 1 to 5. Allowable setting values are as follows: None or 1 to 31 When the CIDR is set to None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as a host address. When the CIDR is set to value other than None, the Host/Net setting is recognized as network address. If the Gateway setting is disabled when booting, None is displayed in the CIDR field. Changes to the mask setting is effective after pressing the Apply Address softkey. Refer to Appendix A on page A-1 for details. *For numeric value entry, the changing magnification softkey is available. Refer to Storing Numeric Values on page 4-10 and Changing Magnification Softkey on page In addition, this screen displays the following information: MAC address Status: Shows how each address is configured. If any abnormality is detected in the IP Addr/Mask setting, Invalid is displayed. If any abnormality is detected in the Default Gateway setting, Invalidis displayed. If the Tester and the Default Gateway does not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed. If any abnormality is detected in the Gateway setting, Invalid is displayed. If the Tester and the gateway do not belong to the same network, Unreachable is displayed N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

415 6 Troubleshooting Item to be checked 6-2 Error Information 6-7 This chapter describes how to solve problems and explains about error information that is displayed on the screen. Agilent Technologies 6-1

416 6 Troubleshooting Item to be checked The symptoms listed below may not be caused by Tester failure. Check the following items before requesting repair. Also, Refer to the N9360A Installation Guide. Table 6-1 Item to be checked Symptom Section to be checked Remedy The Tester is not activated. A message ERROR!! Unit initialization failure. is displayed on screen. The Test SIM card cannot be read by the mobile phone. Location update fails. Call is disconnected at the measurement of Sensitivity BER Is the external reference signal connected correctly? Is the Test SIM card set to the mobile phone correctly? Is the Test SIM card set to the mobile phone correctly? Is the BS level appropriate? Is there interference from the external noise? Is path loss set correctly? Is the BS level appropriate? Is there interference from the external noise? Is path loss set correctly? When the Reference on the [Configuration] screen is set to External, the Tester is not activated unless 10 MHz reference signal is inputted to the Reference IN connector on the rear panel. Connect 10 MHz reference signal to the Reference IN connector and then reboot the Tester. Set the Test SIM card to the mobile phone correctly. When the card is damaged and additional purchase is required, contact the Agilent Sales Department or an authorized distributor to place a purchase order for another Test SIM. Set the Test SIM card to the mobile phone correctly. When the card is damaged and additional purchase is required, contact the Agilent Sales Department or an authorized distributor to place a purchase order for another Test SIM. Set the BS level to appropriate value. Shut out external noise by using the shield case and so forth. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. Set the BS level to appropriate value. Shut out external noise by using the shield case and so forth. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. 6-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

417 Troubleshooting 6 Table 6-1 Item to be checked Symptom Section to be checked Remedy is displayed at the measurement of Sensitivity BER. EGPRS BLER does not result in 0,00%. Radio performance tests tend to fail. Handover fails. Is the BER BS level or the Sens BS level weak? (The above values may differ according to the Radio System.) Is the PWR CTRL low? Is path loss set correctly? Does the slot configuration conform to the multislot class of the mobile phone? Does this symptom still occur in spite of above three remedies? Is the BS level appropriate? Is there interference from the external noise? Is path loss set correctly? Does this symptom still occur in spite of above three remedies? Is there interference from the external noise? Is path loss set correctly? Is TCH for handover set adjacent to BCCH? Increase the BER BS level or the Sens BS level. Set the lower BER Frame. Set the higher PWR CTRL. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. Set the slot configuration which conforms to the multi-slot class of the mobile phone. If a UL RLC/MAC payload happens to contain the Length indicator fields during the GPRS BER measurement, GPRS BER can not be measured precisely. (The above problem is to be solved in the future) The phases of the PN data except PN9fix are supposed to be continuous during the measurement. If the phases become discontinuous halfway, Sensitivity BER can not be measured precisely. Set the BS level to appropriate value. Shut out external noise by using the shield case and so forth. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. The DL EVM of the Tester which is below 12,5% may have a negative influence on EGPRS BLER. Shut out external noise by using the shield case and so forth. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. When handing over to TCH is adjacent to BCCH, handover can fail. Set the frequency of TCH away from that of BCCH. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 6-3

418 6 Troubleshooting Table 6-1 Item to be checked Symptom Section to be checked Remedy Attach process fails in GPRS mode. is displayed at the measurement results. The MS power level is too low or too high. Check PWR CNTL, the cable Connections and loss value is displayed on the Graph/Value screen. Burst not found is displayed on the Graph/Value screen. Does the mobile phone require Detach process? Is the mobile phone connected to the Tester correctly? Is there interference from the external noise? Is the format of the signal inputted to the Tester the same as the setting value of the Tester? Is the slot configuration set correctly? Is the Test loop or the Test Mode set correctly? Is error information displayed on the Graph/Value screen? Is the mobile phone connected to the Tester correctly? Is the transmission power of the mobile phone low? Is there interference from the external noise? Is path loss set correctly? Is the transmission power of the mobile phone low? Is the format of the signal inputted to the Tester the burst wave? Some kinds of GPRS mobile phones are confirmed that they require Detach from Attached condition. In this case, the Tester cancels Attached condition. Retest from Location Update. Make sure that the mobile phone is connected to the Tester,and start the test. Shut out external noise by using the shield case, etc. Set the Signal on the [TX Analyzer] screen according to the actual signal format,and start the test. Set the Slot Config on the [Manual Test] screen according to the multislot class of the mobile phone, and start the test. Set the Test Loop or Test Mode on the [Manual Test] screen according to the Test mode capability of the mobile phone, and start the test. Execute the action according to each error information, and start the test. Make sure that the mobile phone is connected to the Tester,and start the test. Raise the transmission power of the mobile phone to the level within a measurable range. Shut out external noise by using the shield case, etc. Set path loss between the Tester and the mobile phone correctly in the Loss field on the [Configuration: Test Condition (Loss)] screen. Raise the transmission power of the mobile phone to the level within a measurable range. Set the Signal on the [TX Analyzer] screen to Burst,and start the test. 6-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

419 Troubleshooting 6 Table 6-1 Item to be checked Symptom Section to be checked Remedy TSC not found is displayed on the Graph/Value screen. It exceeds the retrial number of times of the measurement is displayed on the Graph/Value screen. TSC out of range is displayed on the Graph/Value screen. Tester seems to stop measuring though it has started the measurements. Does the signal inputted to the Tester contain a training sequence code (TSC)? Is the TSC signal input to the Tester the same as the setting value of the Tester? Is the modulation scheme of the signal input to the Tester the same as the setting value of the Tester? Does this symptom occur on the [Auto Test] or [Manual Test]? Does this symptom still occur in spite of above four remedies? Is the modulation scheme of the signal inputted to the Tester the same as the setting value of the Tester? Does the TSC position within the slot over the air deviate from the appropriate TSC position remarkably? Is the Averaging of the test items except BER/BLER, the BER Frames (BER) or BLER Frames (BLER) high? Input the signal which contains a TSC to the Tester. If the measurement is carried out with the signal which does not contain any TSC, set the None at Midamble on the [TX Analyzer] Screen. If None is set, Part of test items may not be carried out. Input the signal which contains the same TSC as the value set at Midamble on the [TX Analyzer] Screen, and start the test. Input the signal whose modulation scheme is the same as the value set at Demod on the [TX Analyzer] Screen, and start the test. The mobile phone is to be signaled to use TSC5 by the Tester. The mobile phone may use a different TSC from TSC5. The signal quality of the mobile phone may be bad remarkably. Input the signal whose modulation scheme is the same as the value set at Demod on the [TX Analyzer] Screen, and start the test. The TSC position within the slot may exceed a allowable range. In case of GMSK, let the TSC position be within ±10symbols. In case of 8PSK, let the TSC position be within ±4symbols. When the Averaging of the test items except BER/BLER, the BER Frames (BER) or BLER Frames (BLER) is high, it takes long time to finish measuring the test items. The screen display of the tester does not change during the measurements. The time for measuring, which is indicated by T Mes [unit: sec], depends on the test items. Refer to Table 6-2. Until this time, the measurements are executed and tester is not out of order. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 6-5

420 6 Troubleshooting Table 6-2 The time for measuring Measurement TX Power Frequency Error Phase Error Spectrum Monitor T Mes [sec] EVM T Mes = [Ave] x ORFS T Mes = [Ave] + 10 GSM BER (Test Mode A,C) T Mes = [FBER] x GPRS BER (Test Mode B) T Mes = [FBER] x T Mes = [Ave] + 11 BLER T Mes = [F BLER ] / [S] x SRB loopback BER T Mes = [F BLER ] / [S] x [Ave]: Averaging [FBER]: BER Frames [FBLER]: BLER Frames [S]: Send Slot 1: 1x1 2: 2x1, 2x2 3: 3x1, 3x2 4: 4x1 6-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

421 Troubleshooting 6 Error Information Error Screen Figure 6-1 is an example of the screens that are displayed when an error occurs. The output device (EPSON PM-G800 or USB Memory) is displayed on the lower right corner of the screen when pressing the Print Screen softkey. Figure 6-1 An Example of [Error] Screens N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 6-7

422 6 Troubleshooting Softkey Menu Field Softkey Menu Print Screen: Prints a hardcopy of the screen or stores the screen image in a USB memory device, according to the Printer field on the [Configuration] screen. Debug Data > USB: Outputs debug data into a USB memory device. Error Codes for Error Screens Table 6-3 and Table 6-4 list error codes for [Error] screens. If the following guidelines do not help you to remove the errors, contact the Agilent Sales Department or an authorized distributor. Table 6-3 Alarm Notification Error Code Error Code Error Content Action 0000 Abnormal internal temperature Turn off the power, pull out the AC plug and contact the Agilent Technologies Sales Office or a distributor The cooling fan stopped Synthesizer unlock (Tx1) A failure of the internal reference oscillator may have occurred. Turn 0003 Synthesizer unlock (Tx2) off power and disconnect the AC code. If you use the external reference signal, check if it is connected correctly Synthesizer unlock (Tx3) 0005 Synthesizer unlock (Rx1) 0006 Synthesizer unlock (Rx2) 0007 ALC alarm (Tx1) A hardware error occurred. Reboot the Tester ALC alarm (Tx2) 6-8 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

423 Troubleshooting 6 Table 6-3 Alarm Notification Error Code Error Code Error Content Action 1000 Unit reboot is detected. A firmware error occurred. Reboot the Tester Unit fatal error 1002 Unit initialization failure 1005 No indispensable file 1010 Receiving NAK from RF-CPU 2000 No MS configuration information 2002 No scenario 2003 Scenario read error 3001 Scenario execution failure because of a hardware error Table 6-4 UI Timer Error Code Error Code Error Content Action 5001 Time out for waiting for reception of SC response A firmware error occurred. Reboot the 5002 Connecting failure with SC Tester Socket disconnection between UI and SC 5004 SC transmission failure 5100 UI timer processing error (0: other errors) 5101 UI timer processing error (1: existence of the timer number) 5102 UI timer processing error (2: No relevant timer number for stop order) 5200 UI internal error 6000 UI firmware update error 6100 UI procedure file Check Sum Error SC the application mounted in the Tester. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 6-9

424 6 Troubleshooting THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

425 7 Performance and Specifications Measurement Performance 7-2 This chapter lists the performance and specifications of the GSM Option. Refer to the N9360A Installation Guide for the common specification of the Tester. Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual and the N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual for the W-CDMA option and the cdma2000 option respectively. Agilent Technologies 7-1

426 7 Performance and Specifications Measurement Performance Peak TX Power Table 7-1 Peak TX Power Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 20 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Resolution 0.1 db Accuracy GMSK ±1.0 (25ºC ±5ºC) ±1.5 (0ºC to 50ºC) db 8-PSK ±1.0 (25ºC ±5ºC) ±1.5 (0ºC to 50ºC) db 200 bursts Average Power Ramp Table 7-2 Power Ramp Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 20 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Resolution 0.1 db Accuracy GMSK ±1.0 (25ºC ±5ºC) ±1.5 (0ºC to 50ºC) db 8-PSK ±1.0 (25ºC ±5ºC) ±1.5 (0ºC to 50ºC) Display range Vertical 80 db Horizontal Zoom Off: to bits 0.00Bits = 0.00μsec Zoom On: to to db 7-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

427 Performance and Specifications 7 Frequency Error Table 7-3 Frequency Error Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 5 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Measurement Range 60 to +60 khz Resolution 0.1 Hz Accuracy ±(10 + Reference signal) Hz GMSK ±(15 + Reference signal) Hz 8-PSK Phase Error (GMSK) Table 7-4 Phase Error Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 5 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Measurement Range 20 to +20 º Resolution 0.1 º Accuracy GSM850, GSM900: ±1.0 DCS1800, PCS1900: ±1.5 GSM850, GSM900: ±4.0 DCS1800, PCS1900: ±6.0 º RMS º PEAK Burst Timing Table 7-5 Burst Timing Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 5 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Measurement Range 9.9 to +9.9 Bits GMSK:1 symbol = 1 bit 8-PSK:1 symbol = 3 bit Resolution 0.1 Bits N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 7-3

428 7 Performance and Specifications BER, FER/BLER Table 7-6 BER, FER / BLER Item Specification Unit Remarks Input level range 5 to 39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Sync range BER(PN9fix) 0.00 to % BER(PN9) 0.00 to BER(PN15) 0.00 to FER 0.00 to Measurement BER (BER IB,BER II) GSM BER (Test Mode B) GPRS FER GSM FAST BER GSM BLER (Ack/Nack) GPRS, EGPRS BER (Test Mode SRB) EGPRS RX Quality Table 7-7 RX Quality Item Specification Unit Remarks Display Range 0 to 7 Resolution 1 RX Level Table 7-8 RX Level Item Specification Unit Remarks Display Range 0 to 63 Resolution N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

429 Performance and Specifications 7 Actual Timing Advance Table 7-9 Actual Timing Advance Item Specification Unit Remarks Display Range 0 to 63 Bits Resolution 1 Bit Spectrum Monitor Table 7-10 Spectrum Monitor Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 11 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Span f c to f c khz Manual Test mode: f c ± 100 khz f c to f c khz (fixed) RBW 10 or 30 khz Display range (Vertical) 80 db Span: f c to f c khz 80 db Span: f c ±100 khz Accuracy ±2 db Resolution 0.1 db Noise level (P in = 29 dbm) 35 db Span0 Frequency Offset Table 7-11 Frequency Offset Item Specification Unit Remarks Range f c ±100 khz Resolution 0.1 khz N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual 7-5

430 7 Performance and Specifications AM Modulation Table 7-12 AM Modulation Item Specification Unit Remarks Modulation Frequency 1 khz Degree of Modulation 83 % EVM (8-PSK, Option G03) Table 7-13 EVM (8-PSK) Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 5 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Resolution 0.01 % Residual EVM 3.8 % Origin offset suppression (8-PSK, Option G03) Table 7-14 Origin Offset suppression Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 5 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Measurement Range 20 db Resolution 0.01 db Residual Offset 40 db Output RF Spectrum (8-PSK, Option G03) Table 7-15 Output RF Spectrum Item Specification Unit Remarks Input Level Range 0 to +39 dbm Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Measurement Point fc 400, fc khz Resolution 0.01 db Burst wave: 4 timeslot/frame Range 57 db 7-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

431 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges This chapter contains a table of the input fields and allowable choices or ranges of values for test parameters and test items. This table is also useful for configuring the [Configuration: Test Sequence] and [Configuration: Test Condition] screens. Refer to the N9360A W-CDMA User Manual and the N9360A CDMA2000 User Manual when you specify W-CDMA or cdma2000 in the Test Sequence. Agilent Technologies A-1

432 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Automatic Test Procedure Filename BCCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) TCH (Talk) 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) TCH 1~ to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) IMSI 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) Shows the value which is obtained from the mobile phone under test. Before obtaining the value, the default value of the Tester is shown Caller ID Value Max 20 characters of numeric number ("0" to "9"), "*", and "#" A-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

433 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Manual Test (GSM) Test Item Procedure Radio System IMSI Call Drop Time Shows the value obtained from the mobile phone under test. Before obtaining the value, the default value of the Tester is shown On Off BCCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) TCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) On Off Filename GSM850 GSM900 DCS180 PCS to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) Timing ADV 0 to 63 PWR CNTL BS Level Loop Test 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 29: +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm to 50.0 dbm A C Averaging Off 2 to 200 BER BS Lev BER Frames (Test Loop = A) Fast BER Frames (Test Loop = C) RBW Con Mode to 50.0 dbm 1 to to kHz 30 khz Talk Test 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-3

434 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Manual Test (GSM) (continued) Manual Test (GPRS) ORFS. Meas. Count 1 to 200 Caller ID Mode Value On Off Measurement Item Procedure Radio System BCCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) PDTCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) Coding Scheme PWR CNTL BS Level 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm On Off Filename GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm CS1 to CS4 29: +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm to 50.0 dbm Measur Slot 2 to 4 Test Mode A B ACK Averaging Off 2 to 200 Sens BS LV BLER Frames (Test Mode = ACK) BER Frames (Test Mode = B) RBW 110.0dBm to 50.0dBm 1 to to kHz 30 khz ORFS. Meas. Count 1 to 200 Slot Config to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm A-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

435 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Manual Test (EGPRS) Measurement Item Procedure Radio System BCCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) PDTCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) Coding Scheme Puncturing Scheme Inc Redund PWR CNTL BS Level 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm On Off Filename GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm MCS1 to MCS9 P1 to P3 On Off 29: +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm to 50.0 dbm Slot Config Measur Slot 2 to 4 Test Mode A B SRB ACK Averaging Off 2 to 200 EVM Meas. Count 1 to 200 Sens BS LV BLER Frames (Test Mode = ACK) BLER Frames (Test Mode = B) BLER Frames (Test Mode = SRB) RBW 110.0dBm to 50.0dBm 1 to to to kHz 30 khz ORFS. Meas. Count 1 to to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-5

436 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges TX Analyzer Measurement Item On Off Procedure Radio System RFCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) Signal Modulation Filename GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) Burst CW 512 to 885 ( to MHz) BCCH GMSK: PN9 GMSK: PN15 GMSK: All0 GMSK: All1 8PSK: PN9 8PSK: PN15 Offset to PWR CNTL 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm Amplitude to 20.0 Midamble 29: +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm None TSC0 TSC1 TSC2 TSC3 TSC4 TSC5 TSC6 TSC7 Averaging Off 2 to 200 Demod GMSK 8PSK EVM Meas. Count 1 to 200 Measur Range Span Auto 0-400kHz +-100kHz RBW Signal Generator Procedure Filename Radio System RFCH 128 to 251 (869.2 to 893.8MHz) GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS to 124 (921.2 to 959.8MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) Amplitude to 20.0 Modulation Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS to 810 ( to MHz) Off GMSK: BCCH GMSK: PN9 GMSK: PN15 GMSK: All0 GMSK: All1 8PSK: PN9 8PSK: PN15 Offset to A-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

437 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Configuration (Top Menu) Reference Serial Port Internal External Baud Rate Data Length 7 8 Stop Bits Parity Xcontrol None Odd Even None Xon/Xoff GP-IB Address 1 to 15 Terminator Date/Tim e Printer Beeper EOI On Off CR LF CR+LF YYYY 1990 to 2037 MM 01 to 12 DD 01 to 31 HH 00 to 23 MM 00 to 59 USB Memory EPSON PM-G800 Off On AutoBoot Application None FUNC GSM FUNC WCDMA Timer 10 to 60 Network Setting Ethernet IP Addr to CIDR (Mask) 1 to 31 Default Gateway Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 ACT None MAC Addr to Gateway Setting 1 to 5 ACT None Host/Net Host: to Net: to CIDR (Mask) None 1 to 31 Gateway to N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-7

438 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Configuration Procedure Filename Panel Key Serial Port Lock Unlock Baud Rate Data Length 7 8 Stop Bits Parity Xcontrol None Even Odd None, Xon/Xoff Ethernet IP Addr to Mask to GP-IB Address 1 to 15 Terminator Date/ Time Loss: Printer Beeper EOI On Off CR LF CR+LF YYYY 1990 to 2037 MM 01 to 12 DD 01 to 31 HH 00 to 23 MM 00 to 59 RF In RF Out Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 On Off 0.0 to to 99.9 USB Memory EPSON PM-G800 Off On A-8 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

439 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Test Sequence Sequence No 1 WCDMA GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Sequence No 2 WCDMA GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Sequence No 1 2 No 2 and 6 in the Test Sequence table No 5 and 7 in the Test Sequence table Sequence No1 Location Update Execute/Skip selection Sequence No2 Location Update Execute/Skip selection Other Execute/Skip selection RF Output Release Delay BCCH 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) TCH (Talk) 128 to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) TCH 1 to to 251 (824.2 to 848.8MHz) MS Call BS Call MS Release BS Release Handover 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) Lu1 L2 Lu1 L2 Run Auto On 0 to 9 sec 512 to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 885 ( to MHz) (No limitations due to Radio System) 955 to 124 (876.2 to 914.8MHz) Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 3GPP System 1 to 5 Att: Att In 9.9 to +9.9 Att Out 9.9 to to 885 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) 512 to 810 ( to MHz) N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-9

440 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Test Condition Current System GSM W-CDMA Radio System GSM Mode GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 GSM GPRS EGPRS 3GPP System 1 to 5 Signalling Pattern 1 to 255 Network: MCC 000 to 999 BS Level BER BS Level (Sens BSLV for GPRS/EGPRS) Data MNC 00 to 99 NCC 0 to 7 LAC 0 to BS_PA_MFR MS 2 to to 50.0 dbm to 50.0 dbm PN9 PN9Fix PN15 Wait After Change 0.0 to 9.9 Averaging Off 2 to 200 MS Power Class 2 to 5 1 to 3 PWR CNTL: Manual Test PWR CNTL for Peak TX Power 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS : +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm 29: +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm 30: +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm A-10 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

441 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Test Condition (continued) GMS mode GPRS mode EGPRS Mode MS Power Class PWR CNTL: High Mid Low 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm 2 to 5 1 to 3 2:+39dBm to 19:+5dBm BER Frames 1 to Fast BER Frames Loop-back delay LocUpdate Delay Test Loop 1 to : +36dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm Short Mid Long 0 to 9 sec A C BLER Frames 1 to BER Frames 1 to Coding Scheme Test Mode EVM Meas Count 1 to 4 A B ACK 1 to 200 BLER Frames 1 to Coding Scheme Puncturing Scheme Inc Redund Test Mode Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 MCS1 to MCS9 P1 to P3 On Off ACK A B SRB Loss Loss On Off RF In 0.0 to 99.9 RF Out 0.0 to : +33dBm to 31: 32dBm 0: +30dBm to 15: +0dBm N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-11

442 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Limit Peak TX Power to (HI and LO Limit) (Set for each PWR CNTL) Burst Timing Phase Error (RMS) Phase Error (Peak) Frequency Error ORFS Limit (GMSK) ORFS. Mod ORFS Limit (GMSK) ORFS. SW GSM Mode GPRS Mode Sensitivity BER Class Ib Sensitivity BER Class II Sensitivity Fast BER Sensitivity FER RX Quality RX Level Sensitivity BLER Sensitivity BER -9.9 to +9.9 (HI and LO Limit) 0.0 to (HI Limit) (LO Limit depends on HI Limit setting)?99.9 to +99.9, +0.0 to (HI Limit) to (LO Limit) to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) to 0 (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) to 0 (HI Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) 0 to 7 (LO Limit) 0 to 7 (HI Limit) 0 to 63 (LO Limit) 0 to 63 (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) A-12 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

443 Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges A Table A-1 Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges Radio System Screen Item GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Limit (continued) File Management EGPRS Mode File System File Name Comments EVM (RMS) EVM (Peak) EVM (95%) Origin Offset Spr. Sensitivity BLER Sensitivity SRB Loopback ORFS Limit (GMSK) ORFS. Mod ORFS Limit (GMSK) ORFS. SW --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) 0.0 to 99.9 (LO Limit) --- (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) 0.00 to (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) to 0 (HI Limit) --- (LO Limit) to 0 (HI Limit) GSM (Previous Version) W-CDMA (Previous Version) MULTI Arbitrary character string Arbitrary character string N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual A-13

444 A Appendix A Input Fields and Allowable Choices or Ranges THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. A-14 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

445 B Appendix B General Information in the GSM System The GSM System B-2 For your reference, some major information in the GSM system is described in this appendix. Agilent Technologies B-1

446 B Appendix B General Information in the GSM System The GSM System A GSM mobile phone transmits speech as bursts of encoded data. An RF carrier is modulated by the special form of frequency modulation known as the Gaussian Minimum Shift keying (GMSK). Signals are transmitted in short bursts (577 ms each) using the method called Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) on Absolute RF Channels (ARFCNs) spaced 200 khz apart. RF Channels Table B-1 shows the RF channel frequencies and channel numbers for each radio standard. Table B-1 RF Channels GSM850 GSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 Uplink to MHz to MHz to MHz Downlink to MHz to MHz to MHz ARFCN Range 128 to to to to MHz to MHz to MHz to MHz 512 to to 810 Power Classes The power classes are defined as follows: Table B-2 Power Classes GSM850, GSM dbm +37 dbm +33 dbm +29 dbm DCS dbm +24 dbm +36 dbm PCS dbm +24 dbm +33 dbm B-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

447 Appendix B General Information in the GSM System B Power Control Levels The power control levels, RF power levels and permissible tolerances are shown below: Table B-3 Power Control Levels # GSM850, GSM900 DCS1800 PCS dbm ±2 db dbm ±3 db +33 dbm ±2 db dbm ± 3 db * +32 dbm ±2 db * dbm ±3 db +30 dbm ± 3 db dbm ±3 db +28 dbm ±3 db dbm ±2 db +26 dbm ±3 db +26 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db * +24 dbm ±3 db * +24 dbm ±3 db * dbm ± 3 db +22 dbm ±3 db +22 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db * +20 dbm ±3 db +20 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db +18 dbm ±3 db +18 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db * +16 dbm ±3 db +16 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db +14 dbm ±3 db +14 dbm ±3 db dbm ±3 db +12 dbm ±4 db +12 dbm ±4 db dbm ±3 db +10 dbm ±4 db +10 dbm ±4 db dbm ±3 db +8 dbm ±4 db +8 dbm ±4 db dbm ±3 db +6 dbm ±4 db +6 dbm ±4 db dbm ±3 db +4 dbm ±4 db +4 dbm ±4 db dbm ±3 db +2 dbm ±5 db +2 dbm ±5 db dbm ±3 db +0 dbm ±5 db +0 dbm ±5 db dbm ±5 db dbm ±5 db dbm ±5 db dbm ±5 db * This shall be ±2 db when the power level corresponds to the power class of the mobile phone. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual B-3

448 B Appendix B General Information in the GSM System RX Level The RX levels are defined as follows: Table B-4 RX Level # RX Level # RX Level # RX Level dbm to 88 dbm to 66 dbm to 109 dbm to 87 dbm to 65 dbm to 108 dbm to 86 dbm to 64 dbm to 107 dbm to 85 dbm to 63 dbm to 106 dbm to 84 dbm to 62 dbm to 105 dbm to 83 dbm to 61 dbm to 104 dbm to 82 dbm to 60 dbm to 103 dbm to 81 dbm to 59 dbm to 102 dbm to 80 dbm to 58 dbm to 101 dbm to 79 dbm to 57 dbm to 100 dbm to 78 dbm to 56 dbm to 99 dbm to 77 dbm to 55 dbm to 98 dbm to 76 dbm to 54 dbm to 97 dbm to 75 dbm to 53 dbm to 96 dbm to 74 dbm to 52 dbm to 95 dbm to 73 dbm to 51 dbm to 94 dbm to 72 dbm to 50 dbm to 93 dbm to 71 dbm to 49 dbm to 92 dbm to 70 dbm to 48 dbm to 91 dbm to 69 dbm dbm to 90 dbm to 68 dbm to 89 dbm to 67 dbm B-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

449 Appendix B General Information in the GSM System B RX Quality The RX quality is defined as follows: Table B-5 RX Quality # RX Quality # RX Quality 0 <0.2 % to 3.2 % to 0.4 % to 6.4 % to 0.8 % to 12.8 % to 1.6 % 7 >12.8 % Limits for BER and FER The permissible limits for BER and FER are defined as follows: Table B-6 Limits for BER and FER RF Level Mobile Phone BER FER -100 dbm all 0.00 % -102 dbm P>2 W <2.44 % -104 dbm P 2 W <2.44 % <0.10 % Limits for Frequency Error The permissible limits for the Frequency Error are defined as follows: 0.1 ppm N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual B-5

450 B Appendix B General Information in the GSM System THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. B-6 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

451 C Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Introduction C-3 Specifications C-3 Operating the Antenna Coupler C-4 This chapter describes information of the Agilent N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler. Agilent Technologies C-1

452 C Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler C-2 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

453 Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler C Introduction Agilent Technologies N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler enables you to make the RF connection easily between the mobile phone and the Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester. The purpose of this guide is to provide you with the information on the Agilent N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler. This section contains the following: The specifications of the Agilent N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Tester for operating the Agilent N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler with the Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester. Specifications This section lists the specifications of the Agilent N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler. These specifications are the performance standards and limits against which the N9360A-A02 is tested. When shipped from the factory, the N9360A-A02 meets the following specifications: Operation Frequency Range: 824 MHz to 960 MHz, 1710 to 1880 MHz, and 1880 to 1990 MHz Coupling Factor: 15 db (at 824 MHz to 960 MHz; supplemental characteristics) 13 db (at 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz; supplemental characteristics) 11 db (at 1880 MHz to 1990 MHz; supplemental characteristics) Connector Type: N-type (male) Operating Temperature: 0 to 40 ºC Storage Temperature: 20 to 60 ºC Dimension: N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual C-3

454 C Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler Outside Diameter: approximately 34 mm Inside Diameter: approximately 10 mm Length: approximately 42 mm Operating the Antenna Coupler 1 If the antenna of the mobile phone can be stretched, fully stretch the antenna. 2 Connect the Antenna Coupler to the RF IN/OUT connector of the Agilent N9360A Multi UE Tester. C-4 N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual

455 Appendix C N9360A-A02 Antenna Coupler C 3 Insert the antenna into the hole of the Antenna Coupler pushing the Antenna Coupler down to the root of the antenna. NOTE Make sure that the coupler is always placed exactly at the same position for each test with the same type antenna. Only in this way can consistent test conditions and test results be assured. 4 Set the attenuation (loss) values on the [Configuration] screen. Refer to Entering Loss on the Configuration: Test Condition (Loss) screen on page 21. N9360A Multi UE Tester GSM User Manual C-5